TW201106060A - Liquid crystal display apparatus - Google Patents

Liquid crystal display apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201106060A
TW201106060A TW099108912A TW99108912A TW201106060A TW 201106060 A TW201106060 A TW 201106060A TW 099108912 A TW099108912 A TW 099108912A TW 99108912 A TW99108912 A TW 99108912A TW 201106060 A TW201106060 A TW 201106060A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
liquid crystal
optical compensation
group
compensation layer
layer
Prior art date
Application number
TW099108912A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI486677B (en
Inventor
Ayako Inagaki
Original Assignee
Konica Minolta Opto Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Konica Minolta Opto Inc filed Critical Konica Minolta Opto Inc
Publication of TW201106060A publication Critical patent/TW201106060A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI486677B publication Critical patent/TWI486677B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/13363Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation
    • G02F1/133634Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation the refractive index Nz perpendicular to the element surface being different from in-plane refractive indices Nx and Ny, e.g. biaxial or with normal optical axis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/13363Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/13363Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation
    • G02F1/133632Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation with refractive index ellipsoid inclined relative to the LC-layer surface
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F2413/00Indexing scheme related to G02F1/13363, i.e. to birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation, characterised by the number, position, orientation or value of the compensation plates
    • G02F2413/02Number of plates being 2
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F2413/00Indexing scheme related to G02F1/13363, i.e. to birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation, characterised by the number, position, orientation or value of the compensation plates
    • G02F2413/12Biaxial compensators

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a liquid crystal display apparatus in which a viewing angle is increased, a front contrast is improved and a color shift, when viewed from an oblique direction, is prevented. A liquid crystal display apparatus (1) comprises a first light polarizer (2), a first optical compensation layer (3), a liquid crystal cell (4), a second optical compensation layer (5), and a second light polarizer (6), arranged in this order. The first and second optical compensation layers (3, 5) satisfy the following formulae (1) to (3), and the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal cell (4) are oriented in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell (4) at a black display; n x 1 > nz1 > ny1 (1) nx 2 = ny2 > nz2 (2) DSP(Ro1) > 1 > DSP(Rth2) (3)

Description

201106060 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係有關液晶顯示裝置。 【先前技術】 以往,液晶顯示裝置係以玻璃板挾著透明電極、液晶 層、彩色濾光片等之液晶胞與設置於其兩側之2片偏光板 所構成,各自之偏光板係將偏光子(以稱爲偏光膜、偏光 薄膜)以2片光學薄膜(偏光板保護薄膜或光學補償薄膜 )挾著所構成。此外,這種液晶顯示裝置在液晶驅動方式 而言,已開發有 VA ( Virtical Alignment )模式(mode ) 、IPS ( In-Place-Switching)模式、TN ( Twisted Nematic )模式等各種方式,此等中,V A模式係顯示速度快速, 且正面對比優異,因此大畫面液晶TV等大部分採用。 V A模式之液晶顯示裝置係當無外加電壓時,液晶材 料之長軸對於基板面爲垂直配向,因此具有由對於基板爲 垂直方向來看,幾乎可成爲完全的黑顯示,可實現高對比 等的特長。 此外,液晶材料爲垂直配向時,由斜方向觀看時,因 漏光而有在黑顯示產生著色,或對比降低等的問題。此問 題的原因主要有2個,其一係液晶胞所用的液晶層本身在 厚度方向具有相位差(也稱爲延遲(retardation))所造 成的。另一係挾著液晶胞之2片偏光子爲正交(orthogonal 、透過軸爲正交)配置時,此等偏光子之透過軸由正面觀 -5- 201106060 看時,形成正交,但是由斜向觀看時,表觀上形成90度偏 離所造成的。 對於這種問題,提案將折射率nx,ny,nz (但是nx係 薄膜面內之遲相軸方向的折射率、ny係薄膜面內之進相軸 方向的折射率、nz係厚度方向的折射率)設定爲nx>ny>nz 之2片二軸性薄膜配設於液晶胞之兩側,試圖擴大視角的 技術。但是此構成係使用同種薄膜2片分,在成本上有優 點,但是無法得到充分的視角擴大效果。 因此,近年已開發一種將nx = ny>nz之被稱爲負型C板 (plate)的薄膜與nx>nz>ny之被稱爲Z板的薄膜配設於偏 光板,試圖擴大視角的技術(例如參照專利文獻1、2)。 但是上述專利文獻1、2所記載的技術雖可達到視角擴 大,但是未考慮近年特別重視之其他的光學性能、具體爲 正面對比、由斜方向觀看時之色彩偏移,因此仍需要進一 步改善。 〔先行技術文獻〕 〔專利文獻〕 〔專利文獻1〕特開2000-3 96 1 0號公報 〔專利文獻2〕特開2007-148016號公報 【發明內容】 〔發明槪要〕 〔發明欲解決的課題〕 本發明之目的係提供擴大視角,提高正面對比,可防 -6 - 201106060 止由斜方向觀看時之色彩偏移(color shift)的液晶顯示 裝置。 〔解決課題的手段〕 針對上述課題,本發明人等精心硏究發現以往之Z板 係以聚碳酸酯或環烯烴等之熱收縮所作成,因此只能製作 具有正波長分散(DSP>1 )者,但是使用逆波長分散( DSP<1 )之纖維素時,可製作逆波長分散之Z板。此外, 上述專利文獻2係關於波長分散値DSP,且C板較佳爲逆波 長分散、Z板較佳爲正波長分散,但是本發明人等精心硏 究發現以逆波長分散之Z板與正波長分散之C板挾著液晶胞 時,可降低由斜方向觀看時之色彩偏移,可提高視角及正 面對比。即使使用逆波長分散之Z板時,以此Z板單層所構 成時,爲了發揮視角擴大效果,必須將延遲値R〇設定爲 Ro与275之非常大的相位差賦予Z板,因此Z板會將面內之 微小光軸偏差的影響進行增幅,造成正面對比降低的原因 ,但是Z板爲以二軸性薄膜與作爲正型C板功能之液晶層的 層合構成時,只要將延遲値R〇 = 50〜100之2分之1以下的相 位差賦予Z板整體時,可發揮視角擴大效果,且降低相位 差不均,可維持高的正面對比。 有鑑於以上的問題點,依據本發明之第1側面時,液 晶顯示裝置中,其特徵係至少依序具有第1偏光子、第1光 學補償層、液晶胞、第2光學補償層及第2偏光子, 前述第1及第2光學補償層係滿足下述式(】.)〜(3 ) 201106060 前述液晶胞中之液晶分子係當黑顯示時,配向於該液 晶胞之厚度方向。 nxl>nzl>nyl C 1 ) nx2 ^ ny2>nz2 ( 2 ) DSP ( Rol) < 1 <DSP ( Rth2 ) ( 3 ) (但是nx 1係表示前述第1光學補償層之面內之遲相軸 方向的折射率,nyl係表示前述第1光學補償層之面內之進 相軸方向的折射率,nzl係表示前述第1光學補償層之厚度 方向的折射率,nx2係表示前述第2光學補償層之面內之遲 相軸方向的折射率,ny2係表示前述第2光學補償層之面內 之進相軸方向的折射率,nz2係表示前述第2光學補償層之 厚度方向的折射率。Rol係表示下式(8-1)表示之前述第 1光學補償層的面內延遲値,Rth2係表示下式(9-2 )表示 之前述第2光學補償層之厚度方向的延遲値。DSP( Rol) 係前述第1光學補償層之面內延遲値R〇l的波長分散値,在 波長48 Onm下所測定之前述第!光學補償層的面內延遲値 Rol除以在波長63 Onm下所測定之面內延遲値Rol的値。 DSP ( Rth2 )係前述第2光學補償層之厚度方向之延遲値 Rth2的波長分散値,在波長480nm下所測定之前述第2光學 補償層的延遲値Rth2除以在波長63 Onm下所測定之延遲値 Rth2的値。201106060 VI. Description of the Invention: [Technical Field to Be Invented] The present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device. [Prior Art] Conventionally, a liquid crystal display device is formed by squeezing a liquid crystal cell such as a transparent electrode, a liquid crystal layer, or a color filter with two polarizing plates provided on both sides thereof, and each polarizing plate is polarized. The sub-layer (referred to as a polarizing film or a polarizing film) is composed of two optical films (a polarizing plate protective film or an optical compensation film). Further, such a liquid crystal display device has developed various modes such as a VA (virtical Alignment) mode, an IPS (In-Place-Switching) mode, and a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode in the liquid crystal driving method. The VA mode display speed is fast, and the front contrast is excellent, so most of the large-screen LCD TVs are used. In the VA mode liquid crystal display device, when the voltage is not applied, the long axis of the liquid crystal material is vertically aligned with respect to the substrate surface, so that it can be almost completely black display when viewed from the vertical direction of the substrate, and high contrast can be achieved. Specialties. Further, when the liquid crystal material is vertically aligned, when viewed from an oblique direction, there is a problem that coloration occurs in the black display due to light leakage, or the contrast is lowered. There are two main reasons for this problem, and the liquid crystal layer used in a liquid crystal cell itself has a phase difference (also referred to as retardation) in the thickness direction. When the other two polarizers of the liquid crystal cell are orthogonal (orthogonal, the transmission axis is orthogonal), the transmission axes of these polarizers are orthogonal when viewed from the front view-5-201106060, but When viewed obliquely, it is apparently formed by a 90 degree deviation. For this problem, it is proposed to have a refractive index of nx, ny, nz (but the refractive index in the direction of the slow axis in the plane of the nx film, the refractive index in the direction of the phase axis of the ny film, and the refraction in the thickness direction of the nz system) Rate) A technique in which two biaxial films of nx >ny>nz are disposed on both sides of a liquid crystal cell in an attempt to expand the viewing angle. However, this configuration uses two sheets of the same film, and has an advantage in cost, but a sufficient viewing angle expansion effect cannot be obtained. Therefore, in recent years, a film in which nx = ny > nz is called a negative C plate and a film called n plate of nx > nz > ny has been developed in a polarizing plate, and an attempt has been made to expand the viewing angle. (For example, refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2). However, the techniques described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 can achieve a wide viewing angle. However, other optical performances that have been particularly emphasized in recent years, specifically, frontal contrast and color shift when viewed in an oblique direction have not been considered, and further improvement is still required. [PRIOR ART DOCUMENT] [Patent Document 1] [Patent Document 1] JP-A-2000-3 96 1 0 (Patent Document 2) JP-A-2007-148016 [Summary of the Invention] [Inventive Summary] Problem The object of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device which can expand the viewing angle and improve the front contrast, and can prevent the color shift when viewed from the oblique direction. [Means for Solving the Problem] The inventors of the present invention have intensively discovered that the conventional Z plate is formed by heat shrinkage of polycarbonate or cycloolefin, and therefore can only be produced with positive wavelength dispersion (DSP > 1 ) However, when cellulose of reverse wavelength dispersion (DSP <1) is used, a Z-plate of reverse wavelength dispersion can be produced. Further, the above Patent Document 2 relates to a wavelength dispersion 値 DSP, and the C plate is preferably dispersed in a reverse wavelength, and the Z plate is preferably a positive wavelength dispersion. However, the inventors have carefully studied the Z plate and the positive dispersion dispersed in the reverse wavelength. When the wavelength-dispersed C plate is next to the liquid crystal cell, the color shift when viewed in an oblique direction can be reduced, and the viewing angle and front contrast can be improved. When a Z-plate having a reverse wavelength dispersion is used, when the Z-plate is formed as a single layer, in order to exhibit the viewing angle expansion effect, it is necessary to set the retardation 値R〇 to a very large phase difference of Ro and 275 to the Z-plate, so the Z-plate The influence of the slight optical axis deviation in the plane is increased, which causes the front contrast to decrease. However, when the Z-plate is formed by laminating a biaxial film and a liquid crystal layer functioning as a positive C plate, the delay is 値When the phase difference of 1⁄2 or less of R〇=50 to 100 is given to the entire Z plate, the viewing angle expansion effect can be exhibited, and the phase difference unevenness can be reduced, and high front contrast can be maintained. In view of the above problems, according to the first aspect of the present invention, the liquid crystal display device is characterized in that it has at least a first polarizer, a first optical compensation layer, a liquid crystal cell, a second optical compensation layer, and a second In the polarizer, the first and second optical compensation layers satisfy the following formula ().) to (3) 201106060 The liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal cell are aligned in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell when displayed in black. Nxl>nzl>nyl C 1 ) nx2 ^ ny2>nz2 ( 2 ) DSP ( Rol) < 1 < DSP ( Rth2 ) ( 3 ) (But nx 1 represents the late phase in the plane of the aforementioned first optical compensation layer) The refractive index in the axial direction, nyl represents the refractive index in the surface direction of the first optical compensation layer, the refractive index in the thickness direction of the first optical compensation layer, and the second optical in the xx2 system. The refractive index in the retardation axis direction in the plane of the compensation layer, ny2 indicates the refractive index in the surface direction of the second optical compensation layer, and nz2 indicates the refractive index in the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer. Rol is an in-plane retardation 値 of the first optical compensation layer represented by the following formula (8-1), and Rth2 is a retardation 厚度 in the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer represented by the following formula (9-2). DSP (Rol) is a wavelength dispersion 面 of the in-plane retardation 値R〇1 of the first optical compensation layer, and the in-plane retardation 値Rol of the aforementioned optical compensation layer measured at a wavelength of 48 Onm is divided by the wavelength of 63 Onm The measured in-plane retardation 値Rol is measured as follows. DSP (Rth2) is the thickness of the aforementioned second optical compensation layer. Zhi direction retardation Rth2 of wavelength dispersion Zhi, the second optical compensation layer as measured at a wavelength of 480nm divided by the retardation Rth2 Zhi measured at a wavelength of 63 Onm retardation Rth2 of Zhizhi.

Rol=(nxl-nyl)xdl (8-1)Rol=(nxl-nyl)xdl (8-1)

Rth2={ ( nx2 + ny2 ) /2-nz2} xd2) ( 9-2) 201106060 但是dl係表示前述第1光學補償層的厚度(nm ) ,d2 係表示前述第2光學補償層的厚度(nm) ,Rol及Rth2係分 別爲波長590nm下所測定的値)。 本發明之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第1光學補償層較 佳爲含有纖維素系樹脂層者。 本發明之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第1光學補償層較 佳爲滿足下述式(4 ) 、( 5 ), 前述第2光學補償層較佳爲滿足下述式(6 )、( 7 ) 者。Rth2={ ( nx2 + ny2 ) /2-nz2} xd2) ( 9-2) 201106060 However, dl represents the thickness (nm) of the first optical compensation layer, and d2 represents the thickness of the second optical compensation layer (nm). ), Rol and Rth2 are respectively measured by wavelength 590 nm). In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the first optical compensation layer is preferably a cellulose resin layer. In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, it is preferable that the first optical compensation layer satisfies the following formulas (4) and (5), and the second optical compensation layer preferably satisfies the following formulas (6) and (7). .

Rol=50〜100[nm] ( 4) | R t h 1 | = 0〜2 0 [ nm ] ( 5 ) R〇2 = 0〜20[nm] ( 6 )Rol=50~100[nm] ( 4) | R t h 1 | = 0~2 0 [ nm ] ( 5 ) R〇2 = 0~20[nm] ( 6 )

Rth2 = 200〜3 50[nm] ( 7 ) (但是Rthl係表示下式(9-1 )表示之前述第i光學補 償層之厚度方向的延遲値,R〇2係表示下式(8-2 )表示之 前述第2光學補償層的面內延遲値,Ro2及Rthl係分別在波 長5 9 0 n m下所測定的値。Rth2 = 200 to 3 50 [nm] (7) (However, Rthl represents a retardation 厚度 in the thickness direction of the ith optical compensation layer represented by the following formula (9-1), and R 〇 2 represents the following formula (8-2) The in-plane retardation 値 of the second optical compensation layer is shown, and Ro2 and Rthl are enthalpy measured at a wavelength of 590 nm.

Ro2= ( nx2-ny2) x d 2 ( 8-2)Ro2= ( nx2-ny2) x d 2 ( 8-2)

Rthl={(nxl+nyl)/2-nzl}xdl) (9-1))。 本發明之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第1光學補償層係 至少含有纖維素系樹脂層與液晶層,前述纖維素系樹脂層 係相較於前述液晶層,被配設於靠近前述第1偏光子側, 具有面內相位差,同時遲相軸對於前述第1偏光子之吸收 軸爲正交較佳。 -9 - 201106060 本發明之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第1光學補償層係 至少含有纖維素系樹脂層與液晶層,前述纖維素系樹脂層 係相較於前述液晶層,被配設於靠近前述液晶胞側,具有 面內相位差,同時遲相軸對於前述第1偏光子之吸收軸可 爲平行。 本發明之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第2光學補償層較 佳爲由含有DSP値上昇劑之纖維素系樹脂層所構成者。 〔發明效果〕 依據本發明時,液晶胞中之液晶分子係當黑顯示時, 配向於該液晶胞之厚度方向,第1及第2光學補償層係滿足 nxl>nzl>nyl、nx2 ^ ny2>nz2 ' DSP ( Ro1 ) <1<DSP ( Rth2 ),因此可擴大視角,提高正面對比,防止由斜方向觀看 時之色彩偏移(參照實施例)。 〔實施發明之形態〕 以下參照圖說明本發明之實施形態。 [第I實施形態] 圖1 ( a )係表示第1實施形態之液晶顯示裝置1之一例 的槪念圖。 如此圖所示’液晶顯示裝置1係V A模式(m 0 d e )之液 晶顯示裝置,由辨識側朝背光側’依序層合的狀態具有第 1偏光子2、第1光學補償層3、液晶胞4、第2光學補償層5 -10- 201106060 、第2偏光子6。更詳細而言,第1,第2偏光子2,6及第1 光學補償層3係第1偏光子2之吸收軸2J與第1光學補償層3 之遲相軸3J正交,而第1偏光子2之吸收軸與第2偏光子6 之吸收軸正交,而第1光學補償層3之遲相軸3J與第2偏 光子6之吸收軸6J成爲平行的狀態來配設。圖1中,背光係 在圖中之下側,但是也可爲上側。本說明書中,「平行」 、「正交」係指未達嚴密之角度±10°的範圍內。此範圍係 與嚴密之角度的誤差較佳爲未達±5°,更佳爲未達±2°。本 說明書中,遲相軸係指折射率成爲最大的方向。 (1 )液晶胞 液晶胞4係以2片玻璃基板4 1挾著液晶層40所形成。 液晶層40係由棒狀液晶分子所構成,各液晶分子係在 黑顯示時配向於液晶胞4的厚度方向。其中,液晶分子在 黑顯示時配向於液晶胞4的厚度方向係指與配向於玻璃基 板41之垂直方向相同意義,液晶胞4爲VA模式。此種VA模 式之液晶胞4之棒狀液晶的延遲値Rth爲負,其波長分散爲 正。 液晶層4〇之液晶材料可使用介電各向異性(dielectric anisotropy)爲負、折射率異方性Δη = 〇·〇815、介電常數各 向異性Αε = _4.5程度之向列液晶材料等。液晶層之厚度d 無特別限定,使用上述向列液晶材料時,可設定爲3 , 5 μ m 程度。但是白顯不時之亮度係因厚度d與折射率異方性Δη 之乘積Δη‘d之大小而改變’因此爲了得到最大亮度時,Δη •d較佳爲設定在〇.2〜〇.5μιη的範圍。 -11 - 201106060 VA模式之液晶顯示裝置中,TN模式之液晶顯示裝置 一般使用之對掌劑之添加係因會使動態應答特性劣化,因 此較少使用,但是爲了降低配向不良時,也可添加。 多區域構造時,有利於調整各區域間之界面區域之液 晶分子的配向。 多區域構造係指將液晶顯示裝置之一像素分割成複數 之區域的構造。例如VA模式時,在白顯示時,因液晶分 子傾斜,因此傾斜方向與其逆方向係由斜向觀察時之液晶 分子的雙折射之大小不同,在亮度或色調上產生差異,但 是多區域構造時,可改善亮度及色調之視角特性,故較佳 。具體而言,將各像素以液晶分子之初期配向狀態彼此不 同之2以上(較佳爲4或8)的區域所構成,進行平均化可 降低依靠視角之亮度或色調的偏差(不均)。各像素在外 加電壓狀態下,即使液晶分子之配向方向爲連續變化之彼 此不同之2以上的區域所構成,也可得到同樣的效果。在 —像素內,欲使液晶分子之配向方向不同的區域形成複數 時,可利用例如在電極上設置細縫(s 1 i t ),或設置突起 改變電場方向,或使電場密度具有不均等的方法。欲在全 方向得到均等的視角時,增加此分割數即可,但是4分割 或8分割以上即可得到大致均等的視角。特別是8分割時, 可將偏光板吸收軸設定成任意角度,故較佳。各區域之區 域界面有液晶分子應答困難的傾向。V A模式等之平常黑 (Normally black )模式時,維持黑顯示,有亮度降低的 問題。因此液晶材料中添加對掌劑可降低區域間之界面區 -12- 201106060 域。另外,在平常白(Normally White )模式下,維持白 顯示狀態,因此正面對比降低。可設置覆蓋該區域之黑色 矩陣等的遮光層。 (2 )第1、第2偏光子 第1、第2偏光子2、6係僅通過一定方向之偏波面的光 之光學元件,可使用以往公知的方法製作。現在所知之代 表的偏光子例如有聚乙烯醇系偏光薄膜,更詳細而言,有 對聚乙烯醇系薄膜進行碘染色者與二色性染料進行染色者 。這種偏光子係使用將聚乙烯醇水溶液進行製膜,進行一 軸延伸後染色,或染色後進行一軸延伸後,較佳爲以硼化 合物進行持久性處理者。 通常偏光子係藉由作爲保護層之TAC薄膜等挾持著兩 側。TAC薄膜之內面側進行鹼皂化處理,浸漬於上述碘溶 液中進行延伸所製作之偏光子之至少一面上,使用完全皂 化型聚乙烯醇水溶液貼合較佳。另一面上也可用該TAC薄 膜,也可使用其他具有偏光板保護功能的薄膜。也可使用 市售的纖維素酯薄膜(例如Konicaminolta tak KC8UX、 KC4UX、KC5UX、KC8UCR3、KC8UCR4、KLC8UCR5、 KC4UE、KC8UY、KC4UY、KC12UR、KC4FR、以上 Konica Minolta Opto (股)製)。 本發明之構成中,第1偏光子、第2偏光子2、6分別以 2片TAC薄膜挾持,可介由接著劑層貼合於第1、第2光學 補償層3 ' 5 ’但是從薄膜化、構件刪減、光學補償的觀點 ’不經由T A C薄膜而直接貼合於光學補償層3、5較佳。 -13- 201106060 (3)第1、第2光學補償層 第1及第2光學補償層3、5係滿足下述式(1)〜(3) ,從使用的觀點較佳爲薄膜狀(以下也稱爲光學補償薄膜 3、5)。更佳爲再滿足下述式(4) ~(7)。 nxl>nzl>nyl ( 1 ) nx2 ^ ny2>nz2 ( 2) DSP(Rol) <1 <DSP ( Rth2 ) ( 3 ) R ο 1 = 5 0〜1 0 0 [ nm ] ( 4 ) |Rthl | = 0~20[nm] ( 5 )Rthl={(nxl+nyl)/2-nzl}xdl) (9-1)). In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the first optical compensation layer contains at least a cellulose resin layer and a liquid crystal layer, and the cellulose resin layer is disposed closer to the first polarizer than the liquid crystal layer. The side has an in-plane phase difference, and the slow axis is preferably orthogonal to the absorption axis of the first polarizer. -9 - 201106060 The liquid crystal display device of the present invention, wherein the first optical compensation layer contains at least a cellulose resin layer and a liquid crystal layer, and the cellulose resin layer is disposed closer to the liquid crystal layer than the liquid crystal layer The liquid crystal cell side has an in-plane phase difference, and the slow axis is parallel to the absorption axis of the first polarizer. In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the second optical compensation layer is preferably composed of a cellulose-based resin layer containing a DSP 値 rising agent. [Effect of the Invention] According to the present invention, when the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal cell are displayed in black, they are aligned in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell, and the first and second optical compensation layers satisfy nxl > nzl > nyl, nx2 ^ ny2 > Nz2 ' DSP ( Ro1 ) < 1 < DSP ( Rth2 ), thereby widening the viewing angle, improving the front contrast, and preventing the color shift when viewed in an oblique direction (refer to the embodiment). [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. [First Embodiment] Fig. 1 (a) is a view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device 1 of the first embodiment. As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 1 is a liquid crystal display device of the VA mode (m 0 de ), and has a first polarizer 2, a first optical compensation layer 3, and a liquid crystal in a state of being sequentially laminated from the identification side toward the backlight side. Cell 4, second optical compensation layer 5 -10- 201106060, and second polarizer 6. More specifically, the first and second polarizers 2, 6 and the first optical compensation layer 3 are perpendicular to the slow axis 3J of the first optical compensation layer 3 and the absorption axis 2J of the first polarizer 2 is the first. The absorption axis of the polarizer 2 is orthogonal to the absorption axis of the second polarizer 6, and the slow axis 3J of the first optical compensation layer 3 and the absorption axis 6J of the second polarizer 6 are arranged in parallel. In Fig. 1, the backlight is on the lower side in the figure, but may also be on the upper side. In this specification, "parallel" or "orthogonal" means within a range of ±10° which is not at a strict angle. The error between this range and the tight angle is preferably less than ± 5°, more preferably less than ± 2°. In the present specification, the slow phase axis means a direction in which the refractive index becomes maximum. (1) Liquid crystal cell The liquid crystal cell 4 is formed by sandwiching the liquid crystal layer 40 with two glass substrates 41. The liquid crystal layer 40 is composed of rod-like liquid crystal molecules, and each liquid crystal molecule is aligned in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell 4 in black display. Here, the thickness direction of the liquid crystal molecules aligned to the liquid crystal cells 4 in the black display means the same meaning as the vertical direction to the glass substrate 41, and the liquid crystal cell 4 is in the VA mode. The rod-like liquid crystal of the liquid crystal cell 4 of such a VA mode has a retardation 値Rth of negative and a wavelength dispersion of positive. The liquid crystal material of the liquid crystal layer 4 may be a nematic liquid crystal material having a dielectric anisotropy of negative, a refractive index anisotropy Δη = 〇·〇815, and a dielectric anisotropy Α ε = _4.5. Wait. The thickness d of the liquid crystal layer is not particularly limited, and when the nematic liquid crystal material is used, it can be set to about 3, 5 μm. However, the brightness of the white display is changed by the product of the thickness d and the refractive index anisotropy Δη Δη'd. Therefore, in order to obtain the maximum brightness, Δη·d is preferably set at 〇.2~〇.5μιη. The scope. -11 - 201106060 In the VA mode liquid crystal display device, the TN mode liquid crystal display device is generally used for adding a palm powder, which deteriorates the dynamic response characteristics, so it is less used, but it can also be added in order to reduce misalignment. . In the multi-region structure, it is advantageous to adjust the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules in the interface region between the regions. The multi-region structure refers to a structure in which one pixel of a liquid crystal display device is divided into a plurality of regions. For example, in the VA mode, when the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in the white display, the tilt direction and the reverse direction are different in the magnitude of the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules when viewed obliquely, and there is a difference in brightness or hue, but in the multi-region structure It is preferable to improve the viewing angle characteristics of brightness and hue. Specifically, each pixel is composed of a region of 2 or more (preferably 4 or 8) different from each other in the initial alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules, and averaging can reduce variations (unevenness) in brightness or hue depending on the viewing angle. When the pixels are applied with a voltage, the same effect can be obtained even if the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules is a region in which two or more different phases are continuously changed. In the pixel, in order to form a plurality of regions in which the alignment directions of the liquid crystal molecules are different, for example, a slit (s 1 it ) may be provided on the electrode, or a protrusion may be provided to change the direction of the electric field, or the electric field density may be uneven. . If you want to obtain an equal angle of view in all directions, you can increase the number of divisions, but you can get a roughly equal angle of view with 4 or more divisions. In particular, in the case of eight divisions, it is preferable to set the absorption axis of the polarizing plate to an arbitrary angle. The regional interface of each region tends to have difficulty in response of liquid crystal molecules. In the Normally black mode such as the V A mode, the black display is maintained and there is a problem that the brightness is lowered. Therefore, the addition of a palm powder to the liquid crystal material can reduce the interfacial region between regions -12- 201106060. In addition, in the Normally White mode, the white display state is maintained, so the front contrast is lowered. A light shielding layer covering a black matrix or the like of the area may be provided. (2) First and second polarizers The first and second polarizers 2 and 6 are optical elements that pass only the polarized surface in a certain direction, and can be produced by a conventionally known method. The polarizer represented by the present invention is, for example, a polyvinyl alcohol-based polarizing film, and more specifically, a person who dyes a polyvinyl alcohol-based film with an iodine dye and a dichroic dye. Such a polarizer is preferably formed by subjecting a polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution to film formation, performing one-axis stretching, dyeing, or dyeing, and then performing one-axis stretching, preferably by boron compound. Usually, the polarizer is held on both sides by a TAC film or the like as a protective layer. The inner surface of the TAC film is subjected to alkali saponification treatment, and is immersed in at least one surface of the polarizing film prepared by stretching in the iodine solution, and is preferably bonded together using a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution. The TAC film can also be used on the other side, and other films having a polarizing plate protection function can also be used. Commercially available cellulose ester films (e.g., Konicaminolta tak KC8UX, KC4UX, KC5UX, KC8UCR3, KC8UCR4, KLC8UCR5, KC4UE, KC8UY, KC4UY, KC12UR, KC4FR, above Konica Minolta Opto) can also be used. In the configuration of the present invention, the first polarizer and the second polarizer 2 and 6 are respectively held by two TAC films, and can be bonded to the first and second optical compensation layers 3' 5 ' via the adhesive layer but from the film. The viewpoint of the material, the member reduction, and the optical compensation is preferably applied directly to the optical compensation layers 3 and 5 without passing through the TAC film. -13-201106060 (3) First and second optical compensation layers The first and second optical compensation layers 3 and 5 satisfy the following formulas (1) to (3), and are preferably in the form of a film from the viewpoint of use (hereinafter). Also known as optical compensation film 3, 5). More preferably, the following formulas (4) to (7) are satisfied. Nxl>nzl>nyl ( 1 ) nx2 ^ ny2>nz2 ( 2) DSP(Rol) <1 <DSP ( Rth2 ) ( 3 ) R ο 1 = 5 0~1 0 0 [ nm ] ( 4 ) |Rthl | = 0~20[nm] ( 5 )

Ro2 = 0~20[nm] ( 6 )Ro2 = 0~20[nm] ( 6 )

Rth2 = 200〜3 50[nm] ( 7 ) 其中「nx」係表示光學補償層面內之遲相軸方向之折 射率、「ny」係表示光學補償層面內之進相軸方向之折射 率、「nz」係表示光學補償層之厚度方向之折射率,「R〇 J ' 「Rth 」係以下述 式(8 )、 (9 ) 所得的延遲値。此 外, 各式中,所附加之數字「1 」' f _ 2」係表示第1光學 補償 層3、 第2光學補 償層5的數値。 此等數値係在波長 590η m下所 測定的値。 各折射率 之値 可使用例如KOBRA- 21ADH ( 王子計測 機器( 股) ) 或 Axo scan ( AXOMETRICS公司製) ,在 23°C 、5 5%RH的環境下測得。 Ro =( nx-ny) χ d (8) Rth= { (nx+ny) /2 -nz}X d ) (9) 依據此等式(8) 、(9)時 ,折射率爲nx>nz>ny時, R〇>C >、且 滿足-Ro/2<Rth<Ro/2 ,相 反的,Ro>0 、且- -14- 201106060Rth2 = 200~3 50[nm] (7) where "nx" indicates the refractive index of the slow axis direction in the optical compensation plane, and "ny" indicates the refractive index of the phase axis direction in the optical compensation plane, " NZ" indicates the refractive index in the thickness direction of the optical compensation layer, and "R〇J ' "Rth" is a delay 所得 obtained by the following formulas (8) and (9). Further, the numerals "1" and "f _ 2" added to the respective equations indicate the number of the first optical compensation layer 3 and the second optical compensation layer 5. These numbers are the enthalpy measured at a wavelength of 590 η m. The refractive index of each of the refractive indices can be measured in an environment of 23 ° C and 5 5% RH using, for example, KOBRA-21ADH (Prince Measurement Machine (share)) or Axo scan (manufactured by AXOMETRICS). Ro =( nx-ny) χ d (8) Rth= { (nx+ny) /2 -nz}X d ) (9) According to the equations (8) and (9), the refractive index is nx>nz&gt ;ny, R〇>C >, and satisfy -Ro/2<Rth<Ro/2, conversely, Ro>0, and -14-201106060

Ro/2<Rth<Ro/2 時 > 滿足 nx>nz>nyo 此夕t,nxgny>nz 時’ R〇 2 〇且滿足Rth>Ro/2,相反的Ro 2 0且Rth>Ro/2時,滿足 nx 2 ny>nz。 上述式(3)中之「DSP (Rol)」係第1光學補償層3 之面內相位差的波長分散値,具體而言,在波長48 Onm下 所測定之第1光學補償層3的延遲値Ro除以在波長63 0nm下 所測定之延遲値R〇的値。「DSP ( Rth2 )」係第2光學補 償層5之厚度方向之相位差的波長分散値,具體而言,在 波長480nm下所測定之第2光學補償層5的延遲値Rth除以在 波長63 0ηιη下所測定之延遲値Rth的値。此等波長分散値 DSP係當正的波長分散時,DSP>1,而負(逆)的波長分 散時,D S P < 1。 (3 · 1)第1光學補償層 第1光學補償層3係如上述,滿足nxl>nZl>nyl、DSP ( Ro 1 )< 1,即所謂的逆波長分散的Z板。此第1光學補償層3 較佳爲面內之延遲値Rol爲50~100nm,厚度方向之延遲値 Rthl之絕對値爲〇nm~20nm。 爲了將nxl>nzl>nyl、DSP (Rol) <1的性能賦予第1 光學補償層3時,如後述,在具有逆波長分散性之纖維素 系樹脂薄膜上貼合收縮性薄膜,進行延伸同時收縮較佳。 此樹脂經延伸後的二軸性薄膜作爲基材,其上塗佈液晶層 ,經乾燥、固定化較佳。此等與圖2之說明詳述如下。 第1光學補償層3之形態無特別限定,但是以薄膜較佳 。薄膜之厚度d較佳爲40〜ΙΟΟμιη,更佳爲40~70μηι» -15- 201106060 (3 · 1 .1 )第1光學補償層所使用的纖維素系樹脂 第1光學補償層3所使用的纖維素酯無特別限定,纖維 素酯爲碳數2~2 2程度的羧酸酯或芳香族羧酸酯,特佳爲碳 原子數爲6以下的低級脂肪酸。也可使用日本特開2008 -1 975 6 1號公報所揭示之ε-己內酯與纖維素酯樹脂接枝聚合 的纖維素酯樹脂。 與羥基結合的醯基可爲直鏈或支鏈,也可形成環。也 可以其他的取代基取代。相同取代度時,前述碳數較多時 ,雙折射性會降低,因此選擇碳數爲碳數2〜6之醯基。前 述纖維素酯之碳數較佳爲2〜4者,更佳爲碳數2~3者。 具體而言,纖維素酯可使用如纖維素乙酸酯丙酸酯、 纖維素乙酸酯丁酸酯、或纖維素乙酸酯丙酸酯丁酸酯之乙 醯基外與丙酸酯基或丁酸酯基鍵結之纖維素之混合脂肪酸 酯。 形成丁酸酯之丁醯基可爲直鏈或支鏈。本發明之較適 合使用的纖維素酯,例如有纖維素乙酸酯、纖維素乙酸酯 丁酸酯、纖維素乙酸酯丙酸酯、纖維素乙酸酯苯二甲酸酯 〇 本發明之較佳的纖維素乙酸酯苯二甲酸酯以外的纖維 素酯,較佳爲同時滿足下述式(101)及(i〇2)者。 式(101 ) 2.0SX + YS3.0 式(102) 0SYS1.5 式中,X係乙醯基之取代度、Y係丙醯基或丁醯基、 或其混合物的取代度。 -16- 201106060 爲了得到目的之光學特性時,也可混合取代度不同的 樹脂。混合比較佳爲10:90〜90:10 (質量比)。 其中特佳爲使用纖維素乙酸酯丙酸酯。纖維素乙酸酿 丙酸酯較佳爲 1.0SXS2.5,O.l‘Y^l.5、2.0SX + YS3.0者 。醯基之取代度的測定方法可依據A S T Μ - D 8 1 7 - 9 6測定。 本發明用之纖維素酯的數平均分子量係在 6〇000〜3〇〇〇〇〇的範圍’製得之薄膜的機械強度較強,故較 佳。更佳爲使用70000〜200000者。 纖維素酯之重量平均分子量Mw、數平均分子量Μη可 使用凝膠滲透色譜(GPC )測定。 測量條件如下述。 溶劑:二氯甲烷 管柱:311〇(^乂1<:8 06、〖8 05、〖8 03 0(連接昭和電工( 股)製3支使用)Ro/2<Rth<Ro/2> satisfies nx>nz>nyo on the evening t,nxgny>nz' R〇2 〇 and satisfies Rth>Ro/2, the opposite Ro 2 0 and Rth>Ro/2 When nx 2 ny > nz is satisfied. The "DSP (Rol)" in the above formula (3) is a wavelength dispersion of the in-plane phase difference of the first optical compensation layer 3, specifically, the retardation of the first optical compensation layer 3 measured at a wavelength of 48 Onm.値Ro is divided by the 値R〇 of 测定R〇 measured at a wavelength of 63 0 nm. "DSP (Rth2)" is a wavelength dispersion of the phase difference in the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer 5, specifically, the retardation 値Rth of the second optical compensation layer 5 measured at a wavelength of 480 nm divided by the wavelength 63. The delay 値Rth measured under 0ηιη. These wavelength dispersions are DSP when the positive wavelength is dispersed, DSP >1, and the negative (reverse) wavelength is dispersed, D S P < (3·1) First optical compensation layer The first optical compensation layer 3 satisfies the above-mentioned n-type retardation-distributed Z-plate, as described above, satisfying nxl > nZl > nyl, DSP (Ro 1 ) < The first optical compensation layer 3 preferably has an in-plane retardation 値Rol of 50 to 100 nm, and a thickness in the thickness direction 値Rth1 of an absolute 値 of 〇nm to 20 nm. In order to impart the properties of nxl >nzl> nyl and DSP (Rol) <1 to the first optical compensation layer 3, a shrinkable film is bonded to the cellulose resin film having reverse wavelength dispersibility and extended as described later. At the same time, shrinkage is preferred The resin is used as a substrate by extending the biaxial film, and the liquid crystal layer is coated thereon, preferably dried and fixed. These and the description of Figure 2 are detailed below. The form of the first optical compensation layer 3 is not particularly limited, but a film is preferable. The thickness d of the film is preferably 40 to ΙΟΟμιη, more preferably 40 to 70 μηι» -15- 201106060 (3 ·1 .1). The cellulose-based resin used in the first optical compensation layer is used for the first optical compensation layer 3. The cellulose ester is not particularly limited, and the cellulose ester is a carboxylate or an aromatic carboxylate having a carbon number of 2 to 2, and particularly preferably a lower fatty acid having 6 or less carbon atoms. A cellulose ester resin graft-polymerized with ε-caprolactone and a cellulose ester resin disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2008-197975 can also be used. The thiol group bonded to the hydroxy group may be a straight chain or a branched chain, and may also form a ring. It may also be substituted with other substituents. In the case of the same degree of substitution, when the carbon number is large, the birefringence is lowered. Therefore, a fluorenyl group having a carbon number of 2 to 6 carbon atoms is selected. The carbon number of the above cellulose ester is preferably from 2 to 4, more preferably from 2 to 3. Specifically, the cellulose ester may use, for example, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, or cellulose acetate propionate butyrate, and the propionate group. Or a butyrate-bonded cellulose mixed fatty acid ester. The butyl group forming the butyrate may be a straight chain or a branched chain. The cellulose esters which are more suitably used in the present invention are, for example, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate phthalate, and the present invention. The cellulose ester other than the cellulose acetate phthalate is preferably one of the following formulas (101) and (i). Formula (101) 2.0SX + YS3.0 Formula (102) 0SYS1.5 wherein, the degree of substitution of the X-based acetamidine group, the Y-based propyl fluorenyl group or the butyl group, or a mixture thereof. -16- 201106060 In order to obtain the optical properties of the purpose, it is also possible to mix resins with different degrees of substitution. The mixing ratio is preferably 10:90 to 90:10 (mass ratio). Among them, cellulose acetate propionate is particularly preferred. The cellulose acetate fermented propionate is preferably 1.0SXS2.5, O.l 'Y^l.5, 2.0SX + YS3.0. The method for determining the degree of substitution of the thiol group can be determined according to A S T Μ - D 8 1 7 - 9 6 . The film obtained by using the cellulose ester of the present invention having a number average molecular weight of from 6,000 to 30,000 Å has a strong mechanical strength and is therefore preferred. More preferably used for 70,000 to 200,000. The weight average molecular weight Mw and the number average molecular weight Μη of the cellulose ester can be measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The measurement conditions are as follows. Solvent: Dichloromethane Column: 311〇(^乂1<:8 06, 〖8 05, 〖8 03 0 (connected to Showa Denko (share) system)

管柱溫度:25°C 試料濃度:0.1質量% 檢測器:RI Model 504 ( GLScience公司製) 幫浦:L6000 (日立製作所(股)製) 流量:1.0ml/min 校正曲線:使用標準聚苯乙烯STK standard聚苯乙烯 (東曹(股)製)Mw=1 000000〜500爲止之13個試樣所得 的校正曲線。1 3個試樣約等間隔使用。 本發明使用的纖維素酯之原料的纖維素無特別限定, 可使用棉花棉絨、木材漿料、洋麻等。由彼等所得之纖維 -17- 201106060 素酯可以任意比例混合使用。 本發明之纖維素乙酸酯苯二甲酸酯等的纖維素酯可藉 由公知的方法製造。具體而言,可參考日本特開平10-45 804號公報所記載的方法進行合成。 (3.2 )第2光學補償層 第2光學補償層5係如上述滿足nx2$ny2>nz2、1<DSP (Rth2 ),即所謂的正波長分散之負型C板。此第2光學補 償層 5較佳爲 R〇2 = 0~20、Rth2 = 200〜3 50 ° 爲了使第2光學補償層5之延遲値在上述的數値範圍時 ,較佳爲進行二軸延伸處理。此外,此第2光學補償層5含 有纖維素酯時,加熱處理後進行延伸的處理中,爲了盡可 能減少殘留應力時,在纖維素酯之玻璃轉移點± 1 (TC程度 的範圍,以1.1倍〜1.5倍程度在搬送方向(長度方向)與其 正交方向(寬度方向)進行延伸,或將以溶液流延所製作 的薄膜在殘留溶劑量爲2〜100質量%程度殘留的狀態下,在 搬送方向與其正交方向進行1.1〜1.7倍程度延伸較佳。 此第2光學補償層5中,較佳爲控制面內之不均。因此 精密控制延伸溫度與延伸倍率之平衡,然後在光學補償層 5之兩側獨立控制延伸部分(拉幅器之夾具等)較佳。這 種控制係調整夾具位置,同時對於夾具之應力,可藉由調 整延伸溫度與延伸倍率來達成。 第2光學補償層5之形態無特別限定,較佳爲薄膜。薄 膜之厚度爲40〜200μηι,較佳爲40~120μηι。 (3.2. 1 )第2光學補償層所使用的纖維素系樹脂 -18- 201106060 第2光學補償層5所用的纖維素酯無特別限定,可使用 上述第1光學補償層3可使用之纖維素酯中,將s—己內醋與 纖維素酯樹脂接枝聚合的纖維素酯樹脂以外的樹脂。 (3.2.2 ) DSP値上昇劑 此第2光學補償層5中’使延遲値爲上述的數値範圍, 爲了得到本發明的效果,使用D S P値上昇劑較佳。 DSP上昇劑係指藉由添加1 %,使DSP ( Rth )上昇 0.001以上,較佳爲上昇0.002以上的化合物。 DSP上昇劑可使用例如日本特開2007-249180號公報所 揭示之下述一般式(II)的三嗪系化合物。 一般式(II) [化1] ¥ h2 (一般式(π )中,R12係各自獨立表示在鄰位、間位 及對位之至少之一位置上具有取代基之芳香族環或雜環。 X11係各自獨立表示單鍵或-NR13-。其中R13係各自獨立表 示氫原子、取代或非取代之烷基、烯基、芳基或雜環基。 ) DSP上昇劑也可使用圓盤狀化合物。 圓盤狀化合物可使用至少具有2個芳香族環的化合物 〇 本說明書中,「芳香族環」係除了芳香族烴環外,包 -19 - 201106060 括芳香族性雜環。 芳香族烴環中,特佳爲6員環(即苯環)。 芳香族性雜環一般爲不飽和雜環。芳香族性 爲5員環、6員環或7員環,更佳爲5員環或6員環 性雜環一般具有最多的雙鍵。雜原子較佳爲氮原 子及硫原子’特佳爲氮原子。芳香族性雜環例如 、噻吩環、吡咯環、噁唑環、異噁唑環、噻唑環 環、咪唑環、吡唑環、呋咱環、三唑環、吡喃環 '噠嗪環、嘧啶環、噠嗪環及1,3,5 -三嗪環》 芳香族環較佳爲使用苯環、呋喃環、噻吩環 、噁唑環、噻唑環、咪唑環、三唑環、吡啶環、 噠嗪環及1,3,5-三嗪環,特佳爲1,3,5-三嗪環。具 日本特開200 1 - 1 66 1 44號公報所揭示之化合物較 圆盤狀化合物使用。 前述圓盤狀化合物所具有之芳香族環的數較 ,更佳爲2〜12,更佳爲2〜8,最佳爲2~6。 兩個芳香族環之鍵結關係可分爲(a )形成 ’ (b )以單鍵直接結合時及(c )介於連結基結 (因芳香族環的緣故,無法形成螺鍵)。結合關 a)〜(c)中之任一。 (a)之縮合環(兩個以上之芳香族環的縮 如有茚環、萘環、莫環、芴環、菲環、蒽環、苊 苯環、丁省環、芘環、吲哚環、異吲哚環、苯並 苯並噻唑環、吲哚嗪環、苯並噁唑環、苯並噻唑 雜環較佳 。芳香族 子、氧原 有呋喃環 、異噻唑 、啦B定環 、吡咯環 嘧啶環、 體而言, 佳爲作爲 佳爲2〜2 0 縮合環時 合的情形 係可爲( 合環)例 烯環、聯 呋喃環、 環、苯並 -20- 201106060 咪哩環、苯並三唑環、嘌呤環、吲哚啉環、色烯環、喹啉 環、異喹啉環、喹嗪環、喹唑啉環、噌啉環、喹喔啉環、 酿嚷環、喋啶環、咔唑環、吖啶環、菲啶環、咕噸環、吩 嚷環、吩噻嗪環、吩噻噁環、吩噁嗪環及噻蒽環。較佳爲 萘環、奧環、吲哚環、苯並噁唑環、苯並噻唑環、苯並咪 唑環、苯並三唑環及喹啉環。 (b )之單鍵較佳爲兩個芳香族環之碳原子間的鍵結 。二個以上之單鍵’且二個芳香族環結合,在二個芳香族 環間可形成脂肪族環或非芳香族性雜環。 (c )之連結基較佳爲與兩個芳香族環之碳原子鍵結 。連結基較佳爲伸烷基、伸烯基、伸炔基、-CO-、-0-、-NH-、-S-或此等之組合。由組合所構成之連結基例如下所 示。以下之連結基例的左右關係可相反。cl:._CO-0-c2:-CO-NH-c3:-伸烷基-0-c4:-NH-C0-NH-c5:-NH-C0-0-c6:-0-C〇-〇-c7:-〇-伸烷基- 〇-c8:-CO-伸烯基-c9:-CO-伸烯基-NH-clO:-CO_伸烯基- O- cll:-伸烷基- CO-O-伸烷基- 0- C0 -伸烷 基- cl2:-0-伸烷基-C0-0-伸烷基- 0- C0-伸烷基-0-cl3:-0-CO-伸烷基- C0-0-cl4:-NH-C0-伸烯基- cl5:-0-C0-伸烯基-芳香族環及連結基可具有取代基。 取代基例如有鹵素原子(F、Cl、Br、I )、羥基、羧 基、氰基、胺基、硝基、磺酸基、胺基甲醯基、胺磺醯基 、脲基、烷基、烯基、炔基、脂肪族醯基、脂肪族醯氧基 、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、烷氧基羰基胺基、烷基硫基、烷 基磺醯基、脂肪族醯胺基、脂肪族磺醯胺基、脂肪族取代 -21 - 201106060 胺基、脂肪族取代胺基甲醯基、脂肪族取代胺磺醯基、脂 肪族取代脲基及非芳香族性雜環基。 烷基之碳原子數較佳爲1〜8。相較於環狀烷基,較佳 爲鏈狀烷基,特佳爲直鏈狀烷基。烷基可再具有取代換基 (例如羥基、羧基、烷氧基、烷基取代胺基)。烷基(包 括取代烷基)例如有甲基、乙基、η-丁基、η-己基、2-羥 乙基、4-羧基丁基、2-甲氧基乙基及2-二乙基胺基乙基。 烯基之碳原子數較佳爲2~8。相較於環狀烯基,較佳 爲鏈狀烯基,特佳爲直鏈狀烯基。烯基可再具有取代基。 烯基例如有乙烯基、烯丙基及1-己烯基。 炔基之碳原子數較佳爲2~8。相較於環狀炔基,較佳 爲鏈狀炔基,特佳爲直鏈狀炔基。炔基可再具有取代基。 炔基例如有乙炔基、1 -丁炔基及1 -己炔基。 脂肪族醯基之碳原子數較佳爲1~1〇。脂肪族醯基例如 有乙醯基、丙醯基及丁醯基。 脂肪族醯氧基之碳原子數較佳爲1〜10。脂肪族醯氧基 例如有乙醯氧基》 烷氧基之碳原子數較佳爲1〜8。烷氧基可再具有取代 換基(例如烷氧基)。烷氧基(包括取代烷氧基)例如有 甲氧基、乙氧基、丁氧基及甲氧乙氧基。 烷氧基羰基之碳原子數較佳爲2〜10。烷氧基羰基例如 有甲氧基羰基及乙氧基羰基。 烷氧基羰基胺基之碳原子數較佳爲2〜10。烷氧基羰基 胺基例如有甲氧基羰基胺基及乙氧基羰基胺基。 -22- 201106060 烷基硫基之碳原子數較佳爲1 ~ 1 2。烷基硫基例如有甲 基硫基、乙基硫基及辛基硫基。 烷基磺醯基之碳原子數較佳爲1~8。烷基磺醯基例如 有甲烷磺醯基及乙烷磺醯基。 脂肪族醯胺基之碳原子數較佳爲1~1〇。脂肪族醯胺基 例如有乙醯胺基。 脂肪族磺醯胺基之碳原子數較佳爲1〜8。脂肪族磺醯 胺基例如有甲烷磺醯胺基、丁烷磺醯胺基及η-辛烷磺醯胺 基。 脂肪族取代胺基之碳原子數較佳爲1〜10。脂肪族取代 胺基例如有二甲基胺基、二乙基胺基及2-羧基乙基胺基。 脂肪族取代胺基甲醯基之碳原子數餐佳爲2~ 1 0。脂肪 族取代胺基甲醯基例如有甲基胺基甲醯基及二乙基胺基甲 酿基。 脂肪族取代胺磺醯基之碳原子數較佳爲1 ~8。脂肪族 取代胺磺醯基例如有甲基胺磺醯基及二乙基胺磺醯基。 脂肪族取代脲基之碳原子數較佳爲2~10。脂肪族取代 脲基例如有甲基脲基。 非芳香族性雜環基例如有哌啶基及嗎啉基。 由圓盤狀化合物所構成之DSP上昇劑的分子量較佳爲 300〜800 〇 本發明中,除了前述圓盤狀化合物外,也可使用具有 直線的分子結構之棒狀化合物。直線的分子結構係指熱力 學上最安定的結構中,棒狀化合物之分子結構爲直線者。 -23- 201106060 熱力學上最安定的結構可藉由結晶結構解析或分子軌道計 算而得到。例如使用分子軌道計算軟體(例如 WinMOPAC2000、富士通(股)製)計算分子軌道’可得 到化合物之生成熱成爲最小之分子結構。分子結構爲直線 係指如上述計算所得之熱力學上最安定的結構中’以分子 結構而言,主鏈之構成的角度爲140度以上者。 棒狀化合物較佳爲具有至少二個芳香族環者,具有至 少二個芳香族環的棒狀化合物較佳爲下述一般式(1 03 ) 表示的化合物。 —般式(1 03 ) : Ai^-lJ-Ar2 上述一般式(103 )中,Ar1及Ar2係分別獨立爲芳香 族基。 本說明書中,芳香族基係含有芳基(芳香族性烴基) 、取代芳基'芳香族性雜環基及取代芳香族性雜環基。 芳基及取代芳基比芳香族性雜環基及取代芳香族性雜 環基更佳。芳香族性雜環基的雜環一般爲不飽和。芳香族 性雜環較佳爲5員環、6員環或7員環,更佳爲5員環或6員 環。芳香族性雜環一般具有最多的雙鍵。雜原子較佳爲氮 原子、氧原子或硫原子’更佳爲氮原子或硫原子。 方香族基的雜環例如有苯環、呋喃環、噻吩環、吡咯 環、噁唑環、噻唑環、咪唑環、三唑環、吡啶環、嘧啶環 及卩比曉環’特佳爲苯環。 取代方基及取代芳香族性雜環基之取代基,例如有鹵 素原子(F、Cl、Br、〗)、羥基、羧基、氰基、胺、烷基 -24 - 201106060 胺基(例如甲基胺基、乙基胺基、丁基胺基、二甲基胺基 )'硝基、磺酸基、胺基甲醯基、烷基胺基甲醯基(例如 N-甲基胺基甲醯基、N-乙基胺基甲醯基、Ν,Ν-二甲基胺基 甲醯基)、胺磺醯基、烷基胺磺醯基(例如Ν-甲基胺磺醯 基、Ν-乙基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν-二甲基胺磺醯基)、脲基、烷 基脲基(例如Ν-甲基脲基、Ν,Ν-二甲基脲基、Ν,Ν,Ν’-三 甲基脲基)、烷基(例如甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基 、庚基、辛基、異丙基、第二丁基 '第三戊基、環己基、 環戊基)、烯基(例如乙烯基、烯丙基、己烯基)、炔基 (例如乙炔基、丁炔基)、醯基(例如甲醯基、乙醯基、 丁醯基、己醯基、月桂醯基)、醯氧基(例如乙醯氧基、 丁醯氧基、己醯氧基、月桂醯氧基)、烷氧基(例如甲氧 基、乙氧基、丙氧基、丁氧基、戊基氧基、庚基氧基、辛 基氧基)、芳氧基(例如苯氧基)、烷氧基羰|g (例如甲 氧基羰基、乙氧基羰基、丙氧基羰基'丁氧基羰基、戊氧 基羰基、庚氧基羰基)、芳氧基羰基(例如苯氧基羰基) 、烷氧基羰基胺基(例如丁氧基羰基胺基、己氧基羰基胺 基)、烷基硫基(例如甲基硫基、乙基硫基、丙基硫基、 丁基硫基、戊基硫基、庚基硫基、辛基硫基)、芳基硫基 (例如苯基硫基)、烷基磺醯基(例如甲基磺醯基、乙基 磺醯基、丙基磺醯基、丁基磺醯基、戊基磺醯基、庚基磺 醯基、辛基磺醯基)、醯胺基(例如乙醯胺基、丁醯胺基 、己醯胺基、月桂醯胺基)及非芳香族性雜環基(例如嗎 啉基、吡嗪基)。 -25- 201106060 取代芳基及取代芳香族性雜環基的取代基較佳爲鹵素 原子、氰基、羧基、羥基、胺基、烷基取代胺基、醯基、 醯氧基、醯胺基、烷氧基羰基、烷氧基、烷基硫基及烷基 〇 烷基胺基、烷氧基羰基、烷氧基及烷基硫基之烷基部 分與烷基可再具有取代基。烷基部分及烷基之取代基例如 有鹵素原子、羥基、羧基、氰基、胺基、烷基胺基、硝基 '磺酸基、胺基甲醯基、烷基胺基甲醯基、胺磺醯基、烷 基胺磺醯基、脲基、烷基脲基、烯基、炔基、醯基、醯氧 基、醯基胺基、烷氧基、芳氧基、烷氧基羰基、芳氧基羰 基、烷氧基羰基胺基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基、烷基磺醯基 '醯胺基及非芳香族性雜環基。烷基部分及烷基之取代基 例如有鹵素原子、羥基、胺基、烷基胺基、醯基、醯氧基 、醯基胺基、烷氧基羰基及烷氧基。 —般式(1〇3 )中,L1表示選自伸烷基、伸烯基、伸 炔基、-0-、-CO-及此等之組合所成之基的二價連結基。 伸烷基可具有環狀結構。環狀伸烷基較佳爲伸環己基 ’特佳爲1,4-伸環己基。鏈狀伸烷基係直鏈狀伸烷基比具 有支鏈之伸烷基更佳。 伸烷基的碳原子數較佳爲1〜20,更佳爲1〜15,更佳爲 1〜10,更佳爲1〜8,最佳爲1〜6。 伸烯基及伸炔基係具有鏈狀結構比具有環狀結構者佳 ,而具有直鏈狀結構者比具有支鏈之鏈狀結構者更佳。 伸烯基及伸炔基的碳原子數較佳爲2〜10,更佳爲2〜8 -26- 201106060 ’更佳爲2〜6,更佳爲2〜4,最佳爲2 (伸乙烯或伸乙炔) 〇 伸芳基的碳原子數較佳爲6〜20,更佳爲6~1 6,更佳爲 6~12 ° —般式(1〇3)的分子結構中,挾著L1的狀態,Ar1與 Ar2形成之角度較佳爲140度以上。 棒狀化合物更佳爲以下述一般式(1 04 )所示的化合 物。 —般式(104) : AJ-I^-X-LLAr2 上述一般式(104)中,Ar1及Ar2係各自獨立爲芳香 族基。芳香族基的定義及例子係與一般式(103 )的Ar1及 Ar2相同。 —般式(104 )中,L2及L3係各自獨立爲選自伸烷基 、-0 -、- C Ο -及這些組合所成之基的二價連結基。 伸烷基係具有鏈狀結構者比具有環狀結構者更佳’具 有直鏈狀結構者比具有支鏈之鏈狀結構者更佳° 伸烷基的碳原子數較佳爲卜1〇,更佳爲卜8 ’更佳爲 1~6,更佳爲1〜4,最佳爲1或2 (伸甲基或伸乙基)° L2及 L3較佳爲- 0-CO-或- C0-0-。 —般式(104)中’ X爲1,4-伸環己基' 伸乙嫌基或伸 乙炔基。 —般式(1 03 )或(1 04 )表示之化合物的具體例有日 本特開2004- 1 0965 7號公報之〔化1〕〜〔化1 1〕所載的 化合物。 -27- 201106060 其他較佳的化合物如以下所示 [化2] (47) CHaO-^^^-C-O^-^^-dN "C4H,〇- 48) (<*8) Certi5〇 5〇) (51) Λ· —^ 〇 OCH» UC -^^-C〇-£^-bCeH,j? -e-ο-Column temperature: 25 °C Sample concentration: 0.1% by mass Detector: RI Model 504 (manufactured by GLScience) Pump: L6000 (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) Flow rate: 1.0 ml/min Calibration curve: Standard polystyrene A calibration curve obtained from 13 samples of STK standard polystyrene (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) from Mw = 1,000,000 to 500. 1 3 samples are used at equal intervals. The cellulose of the raw material of the cellulose ester used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and cotton linter, wood pulp, kenaf or the like can be used. The fibers -17- 201106060 obtained from them can be mixed in any ratio. The cellulose ester of cellulose acetate phthalate or the like of the present invention can be produced by a known method. Specifically, the synthesis can be carried out by referring to the method described in JP-A-10-45804. (3.2) Second optical compensation layer The second optical compensation layer 5 is a negative C plate which satisfies nx2$ny2 > nz2, 1 < DSP (Rth2), which is a so-called positive wavelength dispersion. Preferably, the second optical compensation layer 5 has R〇2 = 0 to 20 and Rth2 = 200 to 3 50 °. In order to delay the second optical compensation layer 5 within the above range, it is preferable to perform two axes. Extended processing. Further, in the case where the second optical compensation layer 5 contains a cellulose ester, in the treatment of stretching after the heat treatment, in order to reduce the residual stress as much as possible, the glass transition point of the cellulose ester is ± 1 (the range of the TC degree is 1.1). In the state in which the amount of the residual solvent is from 2 to 100% by mass, the film is formed in a state in which the amount of the residual solvent is from 2 to 100% by mass. It is preferable that the transport direction and the orthogonal direction extend 1.1 to 1.7 times. In the second optical compensation layer 5, unevenness in the control plane is preferable. Therefore, the balance between the extension temperature and the extension ratio is precisely controlled, and then optical compensation is performed. It is preferred to independently control the extension portion (the clamp of the tenter, etc.) on both sides of the layer 5. This control adjusts the position of the clamp, and the stress on the clamp can be achieved by adjusting the extension temperature and the extension ratio. The form of the layer 5 is not particularly limited, and is preferably a film. The thickness of the film is 40 to 200 μm, preferably 40 to 120 μm. (3.2. 1) The cellulose used in the second optical compensation layer. Resin-18 - 201106060 The cellulose ester used in the second optical compensation layer 5 is not particularly limited, and s-caprolactone and cellulose ester resin can be grafted using the cellulose ester which can be used in the first optical compensation layer 3 described above. Resin other than the polymerized cellulose ester resin. (3.2.2) DSP 値 rising agent In the second optical compensation layer 5, 'the delay 値 is the above range, and in order to obtain the effect of the present invention, the DSP 値 rising agent is used. Preferably, the DSP rising agent is a compound which increases the DSP (Rth) by 0.001 or more, preferably by 0.002 or more by adding 1%. The DSP rising agent can be used, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2007-249180. The triazine compound of the general formula (II). General formula (II) [Chemical Formula 1] ¥ h2 (In the general formula (π), the R12 systems independently represent at least one of the ortho, meta and para positions. An aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring having a substituent. X11 each independently represents a single bond or -NR13-. wherein R13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. .) DSP risers can also use discotic compounds. As the compound, at least two aromatic rings can be used. In the present specification, the "aromatic ring" is an aromatic hydrocarbon ring in addition to the aromatic hydrocarbon ring, and the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is included in the aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Preferably, the 6-membered ring (ie, benzene ring). The aromatic heterocyclic ring is generally an unsaturated heterocyclic ring. The aromaticity is a 5-membered ring, a 6-membered ring or a 7-membered ring, and more preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic ring generally has the most double bond. The hetero atom is preferably a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom 'excellently a nitrogen atom. An aromatic hetero ring such as a thiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, an oxazole ring, an isoxazole ring, or a thiazole ring. Ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, furazan ring, triazole ring, pyran ring 'pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring and 1,3,5-triazine ring. Aromatic ring is preferably benzene Ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring and 1,3,5-triazine ring, particularly preferably 1,3,5-triazine ring. The compound disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 200 1 - 1 66 1 44 is used as a discotic compound. The number of aromatic rings of the discotic compound is more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 2 to 8, most preferably 2 to 6. The bonding relationship between the two aromatic rings can be classified into (a) formation of 'b (b) when a single bond is directly bonded and (c) a bond between the bases (because of the aromatic ring, a spiro bond cannot be formed). Combine any of a)~(c). (a) The condensed ring (the condensation of two or more aromatic rings includes an anthracene ring, a naphthalene ring, a molybdenum ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, an anthracene ring, an indole ring, a butyl ring, an anthracene ring, an anthracene ring) , isoindole ring, benzobenzothiazole ring, pyridazine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole hetero ring is preferred. Aromatic group, oxygen original furan ring, isothiazole, B ring, In the case of a pyrrole-pyrimidine ring or a compound, it is preferably a condensed ring of 2 to 2 0 condensed ring, which may be a (cyclo) olefin ring, a bifuran ring, a ring, a benzo-20- 201106060 , benzotriazole ring, anthracene ring, porphyrin ring, chromene ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinazoline ring, quinazoline ring, porphyrin ring, quinoxaline ring, stuffed ring, Acridine ring, carbazole ring, acridine ring, phenanthridine ring, xanthene ring, phenothiazine ring, phenothiazine ring, phenothiazine ring, phenoxazine ring and thioindole ring, preferably naphthalene ring, a ring, an anthracene ring, a benzoxazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a benzotriazole ring, and a quinoline ring. The single bond of (b) is preferably a carbon atom between two aromatic rings. Bonding. More than two The bond 'and two aromatic rings are bonded to form an aliphatic ring or a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring between the two aromatic rings. The linking group of (c) is preferably bonded to the carbon atom of two aromatic rings. The linking group is preferably an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a -CO-, -0-, -NH-, -S- or a combination thereof. The linking group composed of the combination is as shown below. The left-and-right relationship of the following linked bases can be reversed. cl:._CO-0-c2: -CO-NH-c3:-alkyl--0-c4:-NH-C0-NH-c5:-NH-C0 -0-c6:-0-C〇-〇-c7:-〇-alkylene- 〇-c8:-CO-alkenyl-c9:-CO-alkenyl-NH-clO:-CO_ Alkenyl-O-cll:-alkylene-CO-O-alkylene- 0-C0-alkylene-cl2:-0-alkylene-C0-0-alkylene- 0-C0-stretch Alkyl-0-cl3:-0-CO-alkylene-C0-0-cl4:-NH-C0-alkenyl-- cl5:-0-C0-alkenyl-aromatic ring and linking group may have The substituent is, for example, a halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, I), a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an amine group, a nitro group, a sulfonic acid group, an aminomethyl fluorenyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, a ureido group, An alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aliphatic fluorenyl group, an aliphatic decyloxy group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, Oxycarbonylamino group, alkylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, aliphatic decylamino group, aliphatic sulfonamide group, aliphatic substitution-21 - 201106060 Amino group, aliphatic substituted aminomethyl fluorenyl group, fat a group substituted with an amine sulfonyl group, an aliphatic substituted ureido group and a non-aromatic heterocyclic group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably a chain alkyl group, more preferably a cyclic alkyl group. More preferably, it is a linear alkyl group. The alkyl group may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkyl group-substituted amine group). Alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups) are, for example, methyl, ethyl, η-butyl, η-hexyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 4-carboxybutyl, 2-methoxyethyl and 2-diethyl Aminoethyl. The number of carbon atoms of the alkenyl group is preferably from 2 to 8. The chain alkenyl group is preferred to the cyclic alkenyl group, and particularly preferably a linear alkenyl group. The alkenyl group may have a substituent. The alkenyl group is, for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group or a 1-hexenyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkynyl group is preferably from 2 to 8. The chain alkynyl group is preferred to the cyclic alkynyl group, and particularly preferably a linear alkynyl group. The alkynyl group may have a substituent. The alkynyl group is, for example, an ethynyl group, a 1-butynyl group, and a 1-hexynyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic sulfhydryl group is preferably from 1 to 1 Å. The aliphatic sulfhydryl group may, for example, be an ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group. The aliphatic methoxy group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic methoxy group has, for example, an ethoxy group. The alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkoxy group may have a substituted group (e.g., an alkoxy group). The alkoxy group (including a substituted alkoxy group) may, for example, be a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group or a methoxyethoxy group. The alkoxycarbonyl group preferably has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkoxycarbonyl group has, for example, a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group. The alkoxycarbonylamino group preferably has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkoxycarbonylamino group is, for example, a methoxycarbonylamino group and an ethoxycarbonylamino group. -22- 201106060 The alkylthio group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkylthio group is, for example, a methylthio group, an ethylthio group and an octylthio group. The alkylsulfonyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkylsulfonyl group is, for example, a methanesulfonyl group and an ethanesulfonyl group. The aliphatic guanamine group preferably has 1 to 1 carbon atom. The aliphatic guanamine group is, for example, an acetamino group. The aliphatic sulfonamide group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The aliphatic sulfonium amine group is, for example, a methanesulfonylamino group, a butanesulfonylamino group or an η-octanesulfonylamino group. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted amine group is preferably from 1 to 10. Aliphatic Substituents Amine groups are, for example, dimethylamino, diethylamino and 2-carboxyethylamino. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted aminocarbamyl group is preferably from 2 to 10. The aliphatic substituted aminomethylmercapto group is, for example, a methylaminocarbamyl group and a diethylaminomethyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted amine sulfonyl group is preferably from 1 to 8. Aliphatic substituted amine sulfonyl groups are, for example, methylamine sulfonyl and diethylamine sulfonyl. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted ureido group is preferably from 2 to 10. Aliphatic Substituents Urea groups are, for example, methylureido groups. The non-aromatic heterocyclic group is, for example, a piperidinyl group or a morpholinyl group. The molecular weight of the DSP rising agent composed of the discotic compound is preferably 300 to 800 Å. In the present invention, in addition to the above discotic compound, a rod-like compound having a linear molecular structure may be used. The linear molecular structure refers to the thermodynamically most stable structure in which the molecular structure of the rod-like compound is a straight line. -23- 201106060 Thermodynamically the most stable structure can be obtained by crystal structure analysis or molecular orbital calculation. For example, using a molecular orbital calculation software (for example, WinMOPAC2000, Fujitsu Co., Ltd.) to calculate a molecular orbital ‘the molecular structure in which the heat of formation of a compound becomes the smallest. The molecular structure is a straight line. In the thermodynamically most stable structure calculated as described above, the molecular structure is such that the angle of the main chain is 140 degrees or more. The rod-like compound preferably has at least two aromatic rings, and the rod-like compound having at least two aromatic rings is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (103). General formula (1 03 ) : Ai^-lJ-Ar2 In the above general formula (103), the Ar1 and Ar2 systems are each independently an aromatic group. In the present specification, the aromatic group contains an aryl group (aromatic hydrocarbon group), a substituted aryl group 'aromatic heterocyclic group, and a substituted aromatic heterocyclic group. The aryl group and the substituted aryl group are more preferable than the aromatic heterocyclic group and the substituted aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group is generally unsaturated. The aromatic heterocyclic ring is preferably a 5-membered ring, a 6-membered ring or a 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Aromatic heterocycles generally have the most double bonds. The hetero atom is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. More preferably, it is a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom. The sulfonyl group-containing heterocyclic ring is, for example, a benzene ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, and a fluorene ring. ring. The substituent of the substituted group and the substituted aromatic heterocyclic group, for example, a halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, 〗), a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an amine, an alkyl group - 201106060 amine group (for example, a methyl group) Amino, ethylamino, butylamino, dimethylamino) 'nitro, sulfonate, aminocarbamimidyl, alkylaminocarbamimidyl (eg N-methylaminocarbamidine) Base, N-ethylaminomethylmercapto, hydrazine, hydrazine-dimethylaminocarbamyl), amidoxime, alkylamine sulfonyl (eg Ν-methylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine- Ethylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine-dimethylamine sulfonyl), ureido, alkylureido (eg Ν-methylureido, hydrazine, hydrazine-dimethylureido, hydrazine, hydrazine, Ν'-trimethylureido), alkyl (eg methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, heptyl, octyl, isopropyl, second butyl 'third pentyl, ring Hexyl, cyclopentyl), alkenyl (eg vinyl, allyl, hexenyl), alkynyl (eg ethynyl, butynyl), fluorenyl (eg methyl, ethyl, butyl, hexyl) Sulfhydryl, lauryl), decyloxy (eg ethoxylated, butyl) Oxyl, hexyloxy, lauryloxy), alkoxy (eg methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentyloxy, heptyloxy, octyloxy) An aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy), alkoxycarbonyl|g (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, propoxycarbonyl 'butoxycarbonyl, pentyloxycarbonyl, heptyloxycarbonyl), An aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), an alkoxycarbonylamino group (e.g., a butoxycarbonylamino group, a hexyloxycarbonylamino group), an alkylthio group (e.g., a methylthio group, an ethylthio group) , propylthio, butylthio, pentylthio, heptylthio, octylthio), arylthio (eg phenylthio), alkylsulfonyl (eg methylsulfonyl) Base, ethylsulfonyl, propylsulfonyl, butylsulfonyl, pentylsulfonyl, heptylsulfonyl, octylsulfonyl), decylamino (eg acetaminol, butyl) An amidino group, a hexamethyleneamine group, a laurylamine group, and a non-aromatic heterocyclic group (for example, morpholinyl, pyrazinyl). -25- 201106060 The substituent of the substituted aryl group and the substituted aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a halogen atom, a cyano group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amine group, an alkyl-substituted amine group, a decyl group, a decyloxy group or a decylamino group. The alkyl moiety of the alkoxycarbonyl group, the alkoxy group, the alkylthio group and the alkylalkylalkylamino group, the alkoxycarbonyl group, the alkoxy group and the alkylthio group may further have a substituent with the alkyl group. The alkyl moiety and the substituent of the alkyl group are, for example, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an amine group, an alkylamino group, a nitro 'sulfonic acid group, an aminomethyl fluorenyl group, an alkylaminocarbamyl group, Aminesulfonyl, alkylamine sulfonyl, ureido, alkylureido, alkenyl, alkynyl, decyl, decyloxy, decylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkoxycarbonyl An aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkylsulfonyl 'nonylamino group, and a non-aromatic heterocyclic group. The substituent of the alkyl moiety and the alkyl group may, for example, be a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an amine group, an alkylamino group, a decyl group, a decyloxy group, a decylamino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an alkoxy group. In the general formula (1〇3), L1 represents a divalent linking group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, -0-, -CO-, and the like. The alkylene group may have a cyclic structure. The cyclic alkyl group is preferably a cyclohexylene group, particularly preferably a 1,4-cyclohexylene group. The chain alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having a branched alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is preferably from 1 to 20, more preferably from 1 to 15, more preferably from 1 to 10, still more preferably from 1 to 8, most preferably from 1 to 6. The alkenyl group and the alkynyl group have a chain structure better than those having a ring structure, and those having a linear structure are better than those having a chain structure. The number of carbon atoms of the alkenyl group and the alkynylene group is preferably from 2 to 10, more preferably from 2 to 8 -26 to 201106060 'more preferably from 2 to 6, more preferably from 2 to 4, most preferably 2 (extended ethylene) Or acetylene) The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 16, more preferably from 6 to 12 °, in the molecular structure of the general formula (1〇3), with the L1 In the state, the angle formed by Ar1 and Ar2 is preferably 140 degrees or more. The rod-like compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (104). General formula (104): AJ-I^-X-LLAr2 In the above general formula (104), each of Ar1 and Ar2 is independently an aromatic group. The definition and examples of the aromatic group are the same as those of Ar1 and Ar2 of the general formula (103). In the general formula (104), each of L2 and L3 is independently a divalent linking group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, -0 -, -C Ο - and a combination thereof. It is preferable that the alkyl group has a chain structure than the one having a ring structure. The one having a linear structure is more preferable to the one having a branched chain structure. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably one. More preferably, it is preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 4, most preferably 1 or 2 (methyl or ethyl). L2 and L3 are preferably - 0-CO- or - C0 -0-. In the general formula (104), "X is a 1,4-cyclohexylene group" or an ethynyl group. Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (1 03 ) or (104) are those contained in [Chem. 1] to [Chem. 1 1] of JP-A-2004- 1 0965. -27- 201106060 Other preferred compounds are shown below [Chemical 2] (47) CHaO-^^^-CO^-^^-dN "C4H,〇- 48) (<*8) Certi5〇5 〇) (51) Λ·—^ 〇OCH» UC -^^-C〇-£^-bCeH,j? -e-ο-

(54) nCjHii(») m ο(54) nCjHii(») m ο

-OC (57) CHatGH^ 丨〒 hch*°~^3^0 甚 CjHj S8) CH3pC--^^-OC--^^TO-^^-OpC»^-OC (57) CHatGH^ 丨〒 hch*°~^3^0 Very CjHj S8) CH3pC--^^-OC--^^TO-^^-OpC»^

-28- (58) (58)201106060 [化3] ^4H9OC-^^^OC-;^^^G0---^^-pC4Hen-28- (58) (58)201106060 [Chemical 3] ^4H9OC-^^^OC-;^^^G0---^^-pC4Hen

溶液的紫外線吸收光譜中,最大吸收波長(Xmax )比 2 5 0 nm更短波長的棒狀化合物可倂用二種類以上。 棒狀化合物可藉由文獻記載的方法合成。文獻例如有 Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. ’ 53 卷,229頁(1 979年)、同 89 卷’ 93頁(1 982年),同145卷,111頁(1 987年),同 1 7 0 卷、4 3 頁(1 9 8 9 年)、J. Am. Chem · S o c.,1 1 3 卷,1 3 49 頁(1991 年),同 118 卷,5346 頁( 1996 年),同 92 卷, 1582 頁(1970 年),J.Org.Chem.,40 卷 > 420 頁(1975 年 ),Tetrahedron,48 卷 16 號,3437 頁( 1992 年)。 (3.3 )添加劑 以上的第1,第2光學補償層3,5中,爲了得到本發明 的效果’必要時可含有添加劑。添加劑無特別限定,較佳 爲選自芳香族末端聚酯系化合物、糖酯化合物、(甲基) -29- 201106060 丙烯酸系化合物、多元羧酸酯系化合物、乙醇酸酯系化合 物、苯二甲酸酯系化合物、脂肪酸酯系化合物及多元醇酯 系化合物、聚酯系可塑劑等。 (3.3.1)芳香族末端聚酯系化合物 本發明可使用下述一般式(I)表示之芳香族末端聚 酯系化合物。In the ultraviolet absorption spectrum of the solution, a rod-like compound having a maximum absorption wavelength (Xmax) shorter than 250 nm can be used in two or more types. Rod compounds can be synthesized by methods described in the literature. For example, Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. '53, 229 (1 979), vol. 89, pp. 93 (1 982), vol. 145, 111 (1 987), same as 1 7 Volume 0, page 4 (1 9 9 9), J. Am. Chem · S o c., 1 1 3 volumes, 1 3 49 pages (1991), same as volume 118, page 5346 (1996), Vol. 92, 1582 (1970), J. Org. Chem., Vol. 40, pp. 420 (1975), Tetrahedron, Vol. 48, No. 16, p. 3437 (1992). (3.3) Additive In the above first and second optical compensation layers 3 and 5, in order to obtain the effect of the present invention, an additive may be contained as necessary. The additive is not particularly limited, and is preferably selected from the group consisting of an aromatic terminal polyester compound, a sugar ester compound, (meth) -29-201106060 acrylic compound, a polycarboxylic acid ester compound, a glycolate compound, and a benzoic acid. An acid ester compound, a fatty acid ester compound, a polyol ester compound, a polyester plasticizer, or the like. (3.3.1) Aromatic terminal polyester compound The aromatic terminal polyester compound represented by the following general formula (I) can be used in the present invention.

—般式(I ) B- ( G-A ) n-G-B (式中,B表示芳基羧酸殘基,G表示碳數2~ 12之烷 二醇殘基或碳數6〜12之芳基二醇殘基或碳數爲4〜12之氧基 烷二醇殘基,A表示碳數4-12之伸烷基二羧酸殘基或碳數 6〜12之芳基二羧酸殘基,η表示1以上的整數。) —般式(I)中,由Β所示之芳基羧酸殘基與G所示之 烷二醇殘基或氧基烷二醇殘基或芳基二醇殘基、Α所示之 伸烷基二羧酸殘基或芳基二羧酸殘基所構成者,藉由與一 般之聚酯系化合物相同反應而得。 本發明所使用之芳香族末端聚酯系化合物之芳基羧酸 成分,例如有苯甲酸 '對第三丁基苯甲酸、鄰二甲苯酸、 間二甲苯酸、對二甲苯酸、二甲基苯甲酸、乙基苯甲酸、 正丙基苯甲酸 '胺基苯甲酸、乙醯氧基苯甲酸等,此等可 以各自1種或2種以上之混合物形態來使用。 本發明可使用之芳香族末端聚酯系化合物之碳數2-12 的烷二醇成分’例如有乙二醇、1,2 -丙二醇、l,3 -丙二醇 、i,2-丁二醇、丨,3_ 丁 二醇、1,2-丙二醇、2-甲基 1,3-丙二 醇、1,4-丁二醇、1,5-戊二醇、2,2-二甲基-1,3-丙二醇(新 -30- 201106060 戊二醇)、2,2-二乙基-1,3-丙二醇(3,3-二羥甲基戊烷) 、2-n-丁基-2-乙基-1,3-丙二醇(3,3-二羥甲基庚烷)、3-甲基-1,5-戊二醇1,6-己二醇、2,2,4-三甲基1,3-戊二醇、2-乙基1,3-己二醇、2-甲基ι,8-辛二醇、1,9-壬二醇、1,10-癸 二醇、1,1 2-十八烷二醇等,此等二醇可以1種或2種以上的 混合物形態來使用。 特別是碳數2〜1 2之烷二醇與纖維素酯的相溶性優異, 故特別理想。 此外’上述芳香族末端聚酯係化合物之碳數4〜12的氧 基烷二醇類成分’例如有二乙二醇、三乙二醇、四乙二醇 、二丙二醇、三丙二醇等,此等之二醇可以1種或2種以上 之混合物形態來使用。 芳香族末端聚酯係化合物之碳數4~12的伸烷基二羧酸 成分’例如有琥珀酸、馬來酸、富馬酸、戊二酸、己二酸 、壬二酸、癸二酸、十二烷二羧酸等,此等可各自1種或2 種以上之混合物形式來使用。 碳數6〜12的伸芳基二羧酸成分,例如有苯甲二酸、對 苯甲二酸、間苯二甲酸、丨,5萘二羧酸、U4萘二羧酸等。 本發明使用的芳香族末端聚酯係化合物係η爲1以上 100以下較佳’數目平均分子量較佳爲3〇〇〜15〇(),更佳爲 40 0-1000的範圍。 又’其酸價爲0.5mgKOH/g以下,羥基價爲 25mgKOH/g以下’更佳爲酸價係〇 以下,羥基 價爲15mgKOH/g以下。 -31 - 201106060 本發明之一般式(η表示之芳香族末端聚酯係化合 物係相對於纖維素酯,較佳爲含有0.5〜30質量%。 以下表示本發明可使用之芳香族末端聚酯系化合物之 具體的化合物,但是本發明不受此限。General formula (I) B-(GA) nGB (wherein B represents an aryl carboxylic acid residue, G represents an alkylene glycol residue having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl glycol residue having a carbon number of 6 to 12 a hydroxyalkyl alkane residue having a carbon number of 4 to 12, and A represents an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue having a carbon number of 4 to 12 or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue having a carbon number of 6 to 12, and η represents An integer of 1 or more.) - In the general formula (I), an aryl carboxylic acid residue represented by hydrazine and an alkyl diol residue or an oxyalkylene glycol residue or an aryl diol residue represented by G The alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue or the aryl dicarboxylic acid residue represented by hydrazine is obtained by the same reaction as a general polyester compound. The arylcarboxylic acid component of the aromatic terminal polyester compound used in the present invention is, for example, benzoic acid 'p-tert-butylbenzoic acid, o-xylene acid, m-xylene acid, p-xylene acid, dimethyl group. Benzoic acid, ethyl benzoic acid, n-propyl benzoic acid 'amino benzoic acid, acetoxy benzoic acid, etc. may be used in the form of a mixture of one type or two or more types. The alkanediol component having a carbon number of 2 to 12 of the aromatic terminal polyester compound which can be used in the present invention is, for example, ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propanediol, i,2-butanediol,丨, 3_ butanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 2-methyl1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 2,2-dimethyl-1,3 -propylene glycol (new-30-201106060 pentanediol), 2,2-diethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dihydroxymethylpentane), 2-n-butyl-2-ethyl -1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylol heptane), 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol 1,6-hexanediol, 2,2,4-trimethyl 1, 3-pentanediol, 2-ethyl1,3-hexanediol, 2-methylι, 8-octanediol, 1,9-nonanediol, 1,10-decanediol, 1,1 2 - octadecanediol or the like, these diols may be used in the form of a mixture of one type or two or more types. In particular, an alkanediol having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is particularly preferable because it has excellent compatibility with a cellulose ester. Further, the 'oxyalkylene glycol component having a carbon number of 4 to 12 in the above aromatic terminal polyester compound' may be, for example, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol or tripropylene glycol. The diol may be used in the form of a mixture of one type or two or more types. The alkylene dicarboxylic acid component having a carbon number of 4 to 12 in the aromatic terminal polyester compound is, for example, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid or sebacic acid. And dodecanedicarboxylic acid, etc., etc., can be used as one type or a mixture of two or more types. Examples of the aryldicarboxylic acid component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms include benzoic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, anthracene, 5 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, U4 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid and the like. The aromatic terminal polyester compound used in the present invention is η of 1 or more and 100 or less. The number average molecular weight is preferably 3 Å to 15 Å (), more preferably 40 0 to 1,000. Further, the acid value is 0.5 mgKOH/g or less, and the hydroxyl value is 25 mgKOH/g or less. More preferably, the acid value is 〇 or less, and the hydroxyl value is 15 mgKOH/g or less. -31 - 201106060 The general formula of the present invention (the aromatic terminal polyester compound represented by η is preferably contained in an amount of 0.5 to 30% by mass based on the cellulose ester. The aromatic terminal polyester which can be used in the present invention is shown below. Specific compounds of the compounds, but the invention is not limited thereto.

〔sl—-I 969 : Ms 9 £0 - aoozo£ooo^ ύτ[sl--I 969 : Ms 9 £0 - aoozo£ooo^ ύτ

"Ha I OOOXOMXOOOO οοοϊα«Ιυοοϋ * Ηυ £ ό 9v卜:Ms《^-8ΟΝχ·ϋ£ϋ0£0£ϋ0ο0-ΨΗϋτ·80£ϋ£ϋο£0:£ϋοόρΓ^Ηϋτ00ό£ϋ£ϋ0£ϋ"Ηϋρο0"Ha I OOOXOMXOOOO οοοϊα«Ιυοοϋ * Ηυ £ ό 9v Bu: Ms "^-8ΟΝχ·ϋ£ϋ0£0£ϋ0ο0-ΨΗϋτ·80£ϋ£ϋο£0:£ϋοόρΓ^Ηϋτ00ό£ϋ£ϋ0£ϋ" Ηϋρο0

QQ

OS : MS i:— i"HO 《^—O8fox8«xoxoooo *x°-tH°-y 《νιοασ£αχαο«χοχαοου \JT ,,-,-Γ fo ΐο ^nnuOS : MS i: — i"HO "^-O8fox8«xoxoooo *x°-tH°-y "νιοασ£αχαο«χοχαοου \JT ,,-,-Γ fo ΐο ^nnu

oboM^Muof01'000··0·' £i£i p ό <c)oboM^Muof01'000··0·' £i£i p ό <c)

^—^lgualx^xou^& 丨 ^"^030H-bo十OO 9 ooodoo0'—^ ^looo«xu£oooo .[ο. ό s £ϋ:£ϋ -32- 201106060 sz>: ϊ= δ?ΪΜ=·' se: i^—^lgualx^xou^&丨^"^030H-bo10 OO 9 ooodoo0'—^ ^looo«xu£oooo .[ο. ό s £ϋ:£ϋ -32- 201106060 sz>: ϊ= δ?ΪΜ=·' se: i

9S : MW 030ι£οχοο£οχοοοοι C ε§1 « -03?5-。00°'人》 ” ODO—HO£OPQO—^^—0001-x0000—^^ » ο 丨 —f'6w50-o£u^r5)lo30£3£ooi"h5^l30°u— ^~^-00ο£6¥00£:°-Η0·α^8-^~^—80-0£00-°"50十00"^~^Or 9 -ooofoclHp'o.rlHsi.Huo-^oa s'^:9S : MW 030 ι£οχοο£οχοοοοιι C ε§1 « -03?5-. 00°'人》 ” ODO—HO£OPQO—^^—0001-x0000—^^ » ο 丨—f'6w50-o£u^r5)lo30£3£ooi"h5^l30°u— ^~^ -00ο£6¥00£:°-Η0·α^8-^~^—80-0£00-°"50 十00"^~^Or 9 -ooofoclHp'o.rlHsi.Huo-^oa s '^:

0X00X0

ΟΟΟ—Η.Η,ΗΟ'Ο十 00- £i § (£.ο二 £ 2: «Ιο I ooo.Ho'clHo.o'do·.. οοοχο£υοοο^1^ίοοοιΙΟ«χοοαο^Ί^δ-(口) 广 ooo—*HoHrlJfe'8 \JT 1 ”H-o γοσοι£*3δ-ο·Γ&Λ) «χυ -33- 201106060ΟΟΟ—Η.Η,ΗΟ'Ο十00- £i § (£.ο二£ 2: «Ιο I ooo.Ho'clHo.o'do·.. οοοχο£υοοο^1^ίοοοιΙΟ«χοοαο^Ί^ Δ-(口) 广ooo—*HoHrlJfe'8 \JT 1 ”Ho γοσοι£*3δ-ο·Γ&Λ) «χυ -33- 201106060

m: I 丨ί-οI £0 —l· ^IOOOIO£OOOOI^ ^ιοοαχϋ«ϊοοοα—^ ^—σοοχαίασοο ^^ ^^ «Xum: I 丨ί-οI £0 —l· ^IOOOIO£OOOOI^ ^ιοοαχϋ«ϊοοοα—^ ^—σοοχαίασοο ^^ ^^ «Xu

sz : .is *HPSz : .is *HP

Or *13.Or *13.

HO -:O8xo«»oooo. i"w £0iol οασχ^χαοου— § VI"HO -:O8xo«»oooo. i"w £0iol οασχ^χαοου— § VI"

SK: I «ϊο I *Ho丨 Οο.ι-£3ό8-8sr308^-^~^- / *M°-«αοοχα£οααο. "Ho * •oooz^£800 oooxowsoso*Ho— —ol oooxo«xoooo ··— £0SK: I «ϊο I *Ho丨Οο.ι-£3ό8-8sr308^-^~^- / *M°-«αοοχα£οααο. "Ho * •oooz^£800 oooxowsoso*Ho— —ol oooxo« Xoooo ··— £0

γο^όξ508ΛΎ.ΟΟΟΗΟ^Η008^Ύο;ϋο-ξΗΡΟΟΟ. "5 rt5 I.αοοχο£οαο^ 0 £0- ΟΟΟΗαΙ~·ο·08_Γο^όξ508ΛΎ.ΟΟΟΗΟ^Η008^Ύο;ϋο-ξΗΡΟΟΟ. "5 rt5 I.αοοχο£οαο^ 0 £0- ΟΟΟΗαΙ~·ο·08_

£0- ooaxoiuooo -«Ιαpi}£0- ooaxoiuooo -«Ιαpi}

ό E -34- 201106060ό E -34- 201106060

r—ls !'ϊ4 j I J ) f'oo-^^-OOOHsi-x.ooo-a-^^.oiboH^-Hbooo-^^-o.oox-si.-.-so-oo-^^-dooH-H.x-ooo-o-^^-c "to —oooxoioooor^wR-ls !'ϊ4 j IJ ) f'oo-^^-OOOHsi-x.ooo-a-^^.oiboH^-Hbooo-^^-o.oox-si.-.-so-oo-^^ -dooH-Hx-ooo-o-^^-c "to —oooxoioooor^w

ZS-J.:.玄S- II £5 .- Ο8χο«χοαοο— -ρο'ο.ηο-£ο.08—o.30ho-£3003— 010 £0 .0£0 補 學 光 2 第 及 Λ 第 之 明 發 本 於 用 合 適 劑 加 添 知 明 說 下 以 層 償 3 3 2 3 層 償 補 學 物光 合 化 酯1 糖第 > 之 明 發 本 2 第 以 個 ^1 有 具 有 含 可 5 其化 且酯 , 糖 種 C 少 至 之 構 結 糖 喃 呋 或 構 結 糖 喃 吡 之 下 或 部 全 的 基 Η 以ο〇 個之 } 12構物 上結合 物 合 化 酯 的 化 酯 經 分 部 -35- 201106060 酯化的比例較佳爲存在於吡喃糖結構或呋喃糖結構內 之OH基的70%以上。 本發明中’酯化合物統稱也稱爲糖酯化合物。 本發明之醋化合物’例如有以下者,但本發明並非限 定於此等者。 例如有葡萄糖、半乳糖、甘露糖、果糖 '木糖、或阿 拉伯糖、乳糖、蔗糖、蔗果四糖、1F-果糖基蔗果四糖、 水蘇糖、麥芽糖醇、乳糖醇、乳果糖(lactulose )、纖維 雙糖、麥芽糖、纖維丙糖、麥芽三糖、棉子糖或蔗果三糖 〇 其他例如有龍膽二糖、龍膽三糖、龍膽四糖、木三糖 、半乳糖基蔗糖等。 此等化合物中,特佳爲具有呋喃糖結構與吡喃糖結構 兩者的化合物。 例如較佳爲庶糖、庶果三糖、庶果四糖、〗F_果糖基 蔗果四糖、水蘇糖,更佳爲庶糖。 本發明之吡喃糖結構或呋喃糖結構中之OH基全部或 一部份進行酯化所使用的單羧酸,無特別的限制,可使用 公知的脂肪族單羧酸、脂環族單羧酸、芳香族單羧酸等。 所使用的羧酸可爲1種,或2種以上之混合。 較佳的脂肪族單羧酸例如有乙酸、丙酸'丁酸、異丁 酸、戊酸、己酸、庚酸、辛酸、壬酸、癸酸、2-乙基-己烷 羧酸 '十一烷酸、十二烷酸、十三烷酸、十四烷酸、十五 烷酸、十六烷酸、十七烷酸、十八烷酸、十九烷酸、二十 -36- 201106060 烷酸、二十二烷酸、二十四烷酸、二十六烷酸、二十七烷 酸、二十八烷酸、三十烷酸、三十二烷酸等之飽和脂肪酸 、i--碳烯酸、油酸、山梨酸、亞油酸、亞麻酸、花生浸 烯酸、辛烯酸等之不飽和脂肪酸等。 較佳的脂環族單羧酸例如有乙酸、環戊烷羧酸、環己 烷羧酸、環辛烷羧酸、或彼等的衍生物。 較佳的芳香族單羧酸例如有苯甲酸、甲苯酸等之苯甲 酸之苯環上導入烷基、烷氧基之芳香族單羧酸、肉桂酸、 二苯基乙醇酸、聯苯羧酸、萘羧酸、萘滿羧酸等具有2個 以上之苯環的芳香族單羧酸、或彼等的衍生物,更具體而 言,例如有二甲基苯甲酸、二甲基苯基酸、二甲基苯甲酸 、連三甲苯酸、γ-異杜基酸、杜基酸、米酮酸、α-異杜基 酸、枯茗酸、α-甲苯酸、氫化阿托酸、阿托酸、氫化肉桂 酸 '水楊酸、〇-茴香酸、m-茴香酸、ρ-茴香酸、染酚酸、 〇-高水楊酸、m-高水楊酸、p-高水楊酸、〇-焦兒茶酸、β-間苯二酚酸、香草酸、異香草酸、藜蘆酸、〇_藜蘆酸、没 食子酸、細辛酸、苦杏仁酸、高茴香酸、高香草酸、高藜 蘆酸、〇-高藜蘆酸、酞酮酸、ρ-闊馬酸,特佳爲苯甲酸。 寡糖的酯化化合物適合作爲本發明之具有1〜12個呋喃 糖結構或吡喃糖結構的至少1種的化合物使用。 寡糖係使源粉、蔗糖等與澱粉酶等酵素作用所製造者 ’可適用於本發明之寡糖例如有麥芽寡糖、異麥芽寡糖、 果寡糖、乳寡糖、木寡糖。 此外’前述酯化合物係1個以上1 2個以下之下述一般 -37- 201106060 式(A )所表示之吡喃糖結構或呋喃糖結構之至少1種進行 縮合後的化合物。但是r21~r25表示碳數2〜22的 醯基或氫原子’ m、η係各自表示〇~12的整數,m + n係表示 1〜1 2的整數。 H-F-hrZS-J.:.Xuan S-II £5 .- Ο8χο«χοαοο— -ρο'ο.ηο-£ο.08—o.30ho-£3003— 010 £0 .0£0 Supplementary Light 2 Λ The first issue of the Ming dynasty is to use the appropriate agent to add the knowledge to the layer to pay 3 3 2 3 layer to replenish the photosynthetic ester 1 sugar page > the first hair 2 2 to have a can 5 The esterification of the conjugated ester of the conjugate of the conjugated oligosaccharide or the saccharide C is less than or equal to The ratio of esterification to 35-201106060 is preferably 70% or more of the OH groups present in the pyranose structure or the furanose structure. The 'ester compounds' are also collectively referred to as sugar ester compounds in the present invention. The vinegar compound ' of the present invention' has the following, for example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, glucose, galactose, mannose, fructose 'xylose, or arabinose, lactose, sucrose, cane tetrasaccharide, 1F-fructose cane tetrasaccharide, stachyose, maltitol, lactitol, lactulose ( Lactulose), cellobiose, maltose, fibrilose, maltotriose, raffinose or canetriose 〇 other such as gentiobiose, gentian trisaccharide, gentian tetrasaccharide, xylotriose, half Lactosyl sucrose and the like. Among these compounds, a compound having both a furanose structure and a pyranose structure is particularly preferred. For example, it is preferably sucrose, sucrose, sucrose, sucrose, sucrose, sucrose, sucrose, and more preferably sucrose. The monocarboxylic acid to be used for esterification of all or a part of the OH group in the pyranose structure or the furanose structure of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known aliphatic monocarboxylic acid or alicyclic monocarboxylic acid can be used. Acid, aromatic monocarboxylic acid, and the like. The carboxylic acid to be used may be one type or a mixture of two or more types. Preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acids are, for example, acetic acid, propionic acid 'butyric acid, isobutyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, heptanoic acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, capric acid, 2-ethyl-hexanecarboxylic acid' Monoalkanic acid, dodecanoic acid, tridecanoic acid, myristic acid, pentadecanoic acid, palmitic acid, heptadecanoic acid, octadecanoic acid, nonadecanic acid, twenty-36-201106060 Saturated fatty acids such as alkanoic acid, behenic acid, tetracosanoic acid, hexadecanoic acid, heptacosanoic acid, octacosanoic acid, tridecanoic acid, or tridecanoic acid, i- - unsaturated fatty acids such as carbenoic acid, oleic acid, sorbic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, arachidonic acid, octenoic acid, and the like. Preferred alicyclic monocarboxylic acids are, for example, acetic acid, cyclopentanecarboxylic acid, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid, cyclooctanecarboxylic acid, or derivatives thereof. Preferred aromatic monocarboxylic acids are, for example, benzene rings of benzoic acid, toluic acid and the like, which are introduced into an alkyl group, an alkoxy aromatic monocarboxylic acid, cinnamic acid, diphenyl glycolic acid, or a biphenylcarboxylic acid. An aromatic monocarboxylic acid having two or more benzene rings, such as a naphthalenecarboxylic acid or a naphthyl carboxylic acid, or a derivative thereof, more specifically, for example, dimethylbenzoic acid or dimethylphenyl acid , dimethyl benzoic acid, tricresoleic acid, γ-heteroduic acid, ruthenic acid, ketonic acid, α-heodoic acid, lauric acid, α-toluic acid, hydrogenated atopic acid, Ato Acid, hydrogenated cinnamic acid 'salicylic acid, barium-anisic acid, m-anisic acid, ρ-anisic acid, phenolic acid, barium-high salicylic acid, m-high salicylic acid, p-high salicylic acid, 〇-pyroic acid, β-resorcinol, vanillic acid, isovaleric acid, cucurbitic acid, 〇 藜 藜 、 、, gallic acid, octanoic acid, bitter almond acid, high anisic acid, high vanillic acid, high Cucurbitic acid, strontium-sorghumic acid, decanoic acid, ρ-camphoric acid, particularly preferably benzoic acid. The esterified compound of oligosaccharide is suitably used as at least one compound having 1 to 12 furanose structures or pyranose structures of the present invention. The oligosaccharide is produced by the action of an enzyme such as a source powder or sucrose with an enzyme such as an amylase. The oligosaccharide which can be applied to the present invention is, for example, malto-oligosaccharide, isomaltoligosaccharide, fructooligosaccharide, milk oligosaccharide, and oligosaccharide. sugar. Further, the above-mentioned ester compound is a compound obtained by condensing at least one of a pyranose structure or a furanose structure represented by the formula (A), which is one or more of the following two or less. However, r21 to r25 represent a fluorenyl group or a hydrogen atom of the carbon number of 2 to 22, and m and η each represent an integer of 〇~12, and m + n represents an integer of 1 to 12. H-F-hr

Rll〜Rl5、R21〜R25較佳爲苯甲醯基、氫原子。苯甲醯 基可再具有取代基R_26(p爲0~5),例如有烷基、烯基、 院氧基、苯基’此等之院基、稀基、苯基可再具有取代基 。寡糖也可使用與本發明之酯化合物同樣的方法來製造。 以下舉本發明之醋化合物的具體例,但本發明不限於 此。 -38- 201106060 [化9]R11 to Rl5 and R21 to R25 are preferably a benzamidine group or a hydrogen atom. The benzamidine group may further have a substituent R_26 (p is 0 to 5), and for example, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, a phenyl group, or the like may be further substituted. The oligosaccharide can also be produced by the same method as the ester compound of the present invention. Specific examples of the vinegar compound of the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. -38- 201106060 [化9]

化合物2 CHjOCOCH, R20Compound 2 CHjOCOCH, R20

C-CHCH, CH3 OR2 OR2 Η 化合物3C-CHCH, CH3 OR2 OR2 Η Compound 3

化合物4Compound 4

ο R4- — C-CjH5 -39- 201106060 [化 10] 化合物sο R4- — C-CjH5 -39- 201106060 [Chemical 10] Compounds

Ο R5« —C^QH*Ο R5« —C^QH*

ϋ R6= —C-CHjϋ R6= —C-CHj

0 R7= —C-CHa 化合物80 R7= —C-CHa Compound 8

Ra= o « . •C-CHj -40- 201106060 [化 11] 化合物9 CH,OR9 CH,OR9 CH2OR9Ra= o « . •C-CHj -40- 201106060 [Chemistry 11] Compound 9 CH, OR9 CH, OR9 CH2OR9

R9= —C-CHjR9= —C-CHj

化合物1C R10= —C-CH, -41 - 201106060 [化 12] 化合物11 CH2ORi1 CHz〇iRliCompound 1C R10=—C-CH, -41 - 201106060 [Chemical 12] Compound 11 CH2ORi1 CHz〇iRli

CH20B11CH20B11

OCHy OCH3 〇CH, 化合物12: R120\?«« ΗOCHy OCH3 〇CH, Compound 12: R120\?«« Η

CH2〇R12 OR12 OR12 Η R12« 6CH» 化合物13CH2〇R12 OR12 OR12 Η R12« 6CH» Compound 13

R13« 0 H •C-CH: -〇 化合物14R13« 0 H •C-CH: -〇 Compound 14

•42- 201106060 [化 13] 化含物15•42- 201106060 [Chemical 13]

R15*· 化合物16f.R15*· Compound 16f.

0 R16» —C—CHj •化合物170 R16» —C—CHj • Compound 17

-43- 201106060 [化 14] 化合物18-43- 201106060 [Chem. 14] Compound 18

R18= —C-CH, 化合物19R18=—C-CH, compound 19

-44- 201106060 [化 15] 化合物20-44- 201106060 [Chem. 15] Compound 20

00

II C-CH,II C-CH,

-45- 201106060 [化 16] 化合物21-45- 201106060 [Chem. 16] Compound 21

R21 = —C-CH, 化合物22R21 = —C-CH, compound 22

本發明之纖維素酯薄膜(第1、第2光學補償層3、5) 爲了抑制相位差値之變動,使顯示品質安定化時,含有纖 維素酯薄膜之0.5〜3 0質量%,特佳爲含有5〜30質量%之本 發明的糖酯化合物。 (3.3.3)(甲基)丙烯酸系化合物 本發明用的(甲基)丙烯酸系化合物係含於光學補償 薄膜時,較佳爲對於延伸方向,顯示負之雙折射性之功能 -46- 201106060 ’而構造無特別限定,較佳爲使乙烯性不飽和單體進行聚 合所得之重量平均分子量爲500以上30000以下的聚合物。 ((甲基)丙烯酸系化合物之雙折射性試驗法) 將(甲基)丙烯酸系聚合物(化合物)溶解於溶劑中 ’進行鑄造製膜後’經加熱乾燥,對於透過率80%以上之 薄膜進行雙折射性評價。 阿貝折射率計_4T ( Atago公司製)使用多波長光源進 行折射率測定。延伸方向之折射率爲ny及正交之面內方向 之折射率爲nx。5 50nm之各折射率,對於(ny-nx) <0的薄 膜’其中(甲基)丙烯酸系聚合物對於延伸方向判斷爲負 的雙折射性。 本發明用之重量平均分子量爲500以上30000以下之( 甲基)丙烯酸系聚合物可爲側鏈上具有芳香環之(甲基) 丙烯酸系聚合物或側鏈上具有環己基之(甲基)丙烧酸系 聚合物。 該聚合物之重量平均分子量爲500以上30000以下者, 且藉由控制該聚合物的組成’例如光學補償薄膜爲本發明 中特佳之纖維素酯薄膜時,可提高該纖維素酯與該聚合物 的相溶性。 側鏈上具有芳香環之(甲基)丙烯酸系聚合物或側鏈 上具有環己基之(甲基)丙燃酸系聚合物較佳爲重量平均 分子量爲500以上1 0000以下者時,除了上述外,顯示製膜 後之纖維素酯薄膜的透明性優異、透濕度也極低、作爲偏 •47- 201106060 光板用保護薄膜之優異的性能。 該聚合物係重量平均分子量爲500以上30000以下,因 此可能是在於寡聚物至低分子量聚合物之間者。合成這種 聚合物時,一般的聚合很難控制分子量,較佳爲使用使分 子量不會太大的方法,且盡可能使分子量整齊一致的方法 〇 特別是本發明之光學補償薄膜所用的(甲基)丙烯酸 系聚合物較佳爲分子內不具有芳香環與羥基之乙烯性不飽 和單體Xa與分子內不具有芳香環,具有羥基之乙烯性不飽 和單體Xb與排除Xa、Xb之可共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體 進行共聚合所得之重量平均分子量2 000以上3 00 00以下的 聚合物X,或不具有芳香環之乙烯性不飽和單體Ya與可與 Ya共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體進行聚合所得之重量平均分 子量500以上3000以下的聚合物Y。 〔聚合物X、聚合物Y〕 調整本發明之光學補償薄膜之RO及Rth的方法,較佳 爲含有分子內不具有芳香環與羥基之乙烯性不飽和單體Xa 、與分子內不具有芳香環,具有羥基之乙烯性不飽和單體 Xb與排除Xa、Xb之可共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體進行共 聚合所得之重量平均分子量2 000以上3 0000以下之高分子 量的聚合物X,更佳爲不具有芳香環之乙烯性不飽和單體 Ya與可與Ya共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體進行聚合所得之重 量平均分子量500以上3000以下之低分子量的聚合物Y。 -48- 201106060 本發明所使用的聚合物X係分子內不具有芳香環與親 水性基之乙烯性不飽和單體xa與分子內不具有芳香環而具 有羥基之乙烯性不飽和單體Xb與排除Xa、Xb之可共聚合 之乙烯性不飽和單體進行共聚合所得之重量平均分子量 2000以上30000以下的聚合物。 較佳爲Xa係分子內不具有芳香環與羥基之丙烯酸或甲 基丙烯酸單體,Xb係分子內不含有芳香環而具有羥基之丙 烯酸或甲基丙烯酸單體。 本發明所使用的聚合物X係以下述一般式(X )表示 〇 —般式(X ) -[Xa]m-[Xb]n-[Xc]p- 上述一般式(X )中,Xa係表示分子內不具有芳香環 與經基之乙稀性不飽和單體,Xb係表示分子內不具有芳香 環,而具有羥基之乙烯性不飽和單體,Xc係表示排除Xa、 Xb之可共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體。m、p係分別表示 莫耳組成比。但是m#0、n#〇、m + n + p = 100。 本發明使用之聚合物X較佳爲下述一般式(Χ-l)表示 的聚合物。 一般式(X-1 ) -[CH2-C ( -R1 ) ( -C02R2 ) ]m-[CH2-C ( -R3 )(- C〇2R4-OH ) - ] η - [ X c ] p - 上述一般式(X-l )中,R1、R3係分別表示氫原子或 甲基。R2係表示碳數1〜12的烷基或環烷基。R4係表示- -49- 201106060 CH2-、-C2H4 -或- C3H6-。Xc 係表示可與[CH2-C ( -Rl)(-C02R2)]或[CH2-C(-R3) (-C02R4-0H)-]聚合之單體 單位。m、n及p係表示莫耳組成比。但是、n#0、 m + n + p=100 〇 構成本發明所使用之聚合物X之單體單位的單體如下 述所示,但不限於此。 X中’羥基係指不僅是經基,也包括具有環氧乙垸鏈 的基。 分子內不具有芳香環與羥基之乙烯性不飽和單體Xa, 例如有丙烯酸甲酯、丙烯酸乙酯、丙烯酸丙酯(i-、η-) 、丙烯酸丁酯(n-、i-、s-、t-)、丙烯酸戊酯(n-、i-、 s-)、丙烯酸己酯(n-、i-)、丙烯酸庚酯(n-、i-)、丙 烯酸辛酯(n-、i-)、丙烯酸壬酯(η·、ί-)、丙烯酸十四 烷酯(n-、i-)、丙烯酸(2-乙基己酯)、丙烯酸(ε-己 內酯)等或將上述丙烯酸酯改變成甲基丙烯酸酯者。其中 較佳爲丙烯酸甲酯、丙烯酸乙酯、甲基丙烯酸甲酯、甲基 丙烯酸乙酯、甲基丙烯酸丙酯(i-、η-)。 分子內不具有芳香環,而具有羥基之乙烯性不飽和單 體Xb係具有羥基之單體單位較佳爲丙烯酸或甲基丙烯酸酯 ,例如有丙烯酸(2-羥基乙酯)、丙烯酸(2-羥基丙酯) 、丙烯酸(3-羥基丙酯)、丙烯酸(4-羥基丁酯)、丙烯 酸(2-羥基丁酯),或將此等丙烯酸置換成甲基丙烯酸者 ,較佳爲丙烯酸(2-羥基乙酯)及甲基丙烯酸(2-羥基乙 酯)、丙烯酸(2-羥基丙酯)、丙烯酸(3-羥基丙酯)。 -50- 201106060The cellulose ester film of the present invention (the first and second optical compensation layers 3 and 5) contains 0.5 to 30% by mass of the cellulose ester film in order to suppress the fluctuation of the phase difference , and to stabilize the display quality. It is a sugar ester compound of the present invention containing 5 to 30% by mass. (3.3.3) (Meth)Acrylic Compound When the (meth)acrylic compound used in the present invention is contained in an optical compensation film, it is preferably a function of exhibiting negative birefringence in the extending direction -46-201106060 The structure is not particularly limited, and a polymer having a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 30,000 or less obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferred. (Birefringence test method of (meth)acrylic compound) The (meth)acrylic polymer (compound) was dissolved in a solvent, and after being cast and formed into a film, it was dried by heating, and the film having a transmittance of 80% or more was used. The birefringence evaluation was performed. The Abbe refractometer _4T (manufactured by Atago Co., Ltd.) uses a multi-wavelength light source to measure the refractive index. The refractive index in the extending direction is ny and the refractive index in the in-plane direction of the orthogonal direction is nx. 5 refractive index of 50 nm, for a film of (ny-nx) < 0, wherein the (meth)acrylic polymer is judged to have a negative birefringence with respect to the extending direction. The (meth)acrylic polymer having a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 30,000 or less used in the present invention may be a (meth)acrylic polymer having an aromatic ring in a side chain or a (meth)acrylic group having a cyclohexyl group in a side chain. Propionic acid polymer. When the weight average molecular weight of the polymer is 500 or more and 30,000 or less, and the composition of the polymer is controlled, for example, the optical compensation film is a particularly preferred cellulose ester film in the invention, the cellulose ester and the polymer can be improved. Compatibility. When the (meth)acrylic polymer having an aromatic ring in the side chain or the (meth)acrylic acid polymer having a cyclohexyl group in the side chain is preferably a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 1,000,000 or less, in addition to the above In addition, it is shown that the cellulose ester film after film formation is excellent in transparency and extremely low in moisture permeability, and is excellent in performance as a protective film for a light plate of No. 47-201106060. The polymer has a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 30,000 or less, and thus may be between the oligomer and the low molecular weight polymer. When synthesizing such a polymer, it is difficult to control the molecular weight in general polymerization, and it is preferred to use a method in which the molecular weight is not too large, and to make the molecular weight uniform as much as possible, particularly for the optical compensation film of the present invention. The acrylic polymer is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Xa having no aromatic ring and hydroxyl group in the molecule and having no aromatic ring in the molecule, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydroxyl group Xb and excluding Xa and Xb. Polymer X having a weight average molecular weight of 2 000 or more and 300 00 or less obtained by copolymerization of a copolymerized ethylenically unsaturated monomer, or an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Ya having no aromatic ring and ethylene copolymerizable with Ya The polymer Y obtained by polymerization of the unsaturated monomer has a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 3,000 or less. [Polymer X, Polymer Y] The method of adjusting the RO and Rth of the optical compensation film of the present invention preferably contains an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Xa having no aromatic ring and a hydroxyl group in the molecule, and has no aromaticity in the molecule. a high molecular weight polymer X having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more and 30,000 or less obtained by copolymerization of a hydroxyl group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer Xb and a copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer excluding Xa and Xb, More preferably, it is a low molecular weight polymer Y having a weight average molecular weight of 500 or more and 3000 or less obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Ya having no aromatic ring and an ethylenically unsaturated monomer copolymerizable with Ya. -48- 201106060 The polymer X used in the present invention has an ethylenically unsaturated monomer xa having no aromatic ring and hydrophilic group in the molecule, and an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Xb having a hydroxyl group in the molecule and having a hydroxyl group. A polymer having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more and 30,000 or less obtained by copolymerization of the copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer of Xa and Xb is excluded. Preferably, the Xa-based acrylic acid or methacrylic acid monomer having no aromatic ring and hydroxyl group in the molecule, and the Xb-based acrylic acid or methacrylic acid monomer having no aromatic ring and having a hydroxyl group. The polymer X used in the present invention is represented by the following general formula (X): (X) - [Xa]m - [Xb] n - [Xc]p - in the above general formula (X), Xa It means an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having no aromatic ring and a meridine in the molecule, Xb means an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having no aromatic ring in the molecule and having a hydroxyl group, and Xc means that Xa and Xb are excluded. Polymerized ethylenically unsaturated monomer. The m and p systems respectively represent the molar composition ratio. However, m#0, n#〇, m + n + p = 100. The polymer X used in the present invention is preferably a polymer represented by the following general formula (Χ-1). General formula (X-1) -[CH2-C(-R1)(-C02R2)]m-[CH2-C(-R3)(-C〇2R4-OH)-] η - [ X c ] p - In the general formula (Xl), R1 and R3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R2 represents an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. R4 represents -49-201106060 CH2-, -C2H4- or -C3H6-. Xc represents a monomer unit which can be polymerized with [CH2-C (-Rl)(-C02R2)] or [CH2-C(-R3) (-C02R4-0H)-]. m, n and p represent the molar composition ratio. However, n#0, m + n + p = 100 单体 The monomer constituting the monomer unit of the polymer X used in the present invention is as follows, but is not limited thereto. The term 'hydroxyl group' in X means not only a mesogenic group but also a group having an epoxy oxime chain. The ethylenically unsaturated monomer Xa having no aromatic ring and hydroxyl group in the molecule, for example, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate (i-, η-), butyl acrylate (n-, i-, s- , t-), amyl acrylate (n-, i-, s-), hexyl acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl acrylate (n-, i-), octyl acrylate (n-, i- ), decyl acrylate (η·, ί-), tetradecyl acrylate (n-, i-), acrylic acid (2-ethylhexyl), acrylic acid (ε-caprolactone), etc. or the above acrylate Change to methacrylate. Among them, preferred are methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, and propyl methacrylate (i-, η-). The monomer having no hydroxyl group in the molecule, and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydroxyl group Xb having a hydroxyl group is preferably acrylic acid or methacrylic acid ester, for example, acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl ester) or acrylic acid (2- Hydroxypropyl ester), acrylic acid (3-hydroxypropyl ester), acrylic acid (4-hydroxybutyl ester), acrylic acid (2-hydroxybutyl ester), or the replacement of such acrylic acid with methacrylic acid, preferably acrylic acid (2) -Hydroxyethyl ester) and (2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate), (2-hydroxypropyl) acrylate, (3-hydroxypropyl) acrylate. -50- 201106060

Xc只要是Xa、Xb以外的單體,且可共聚合之乙烯性 不飽和單體時,即無特別限定,較佳爲不具有芳香環者。When Xc is a monomer other than Xa or Xb and a copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer, it is not particularly limited, and it is preferably one which does not have an aromatic ring.

Xa及Xb之莫耳組成比m:n較佳爲99:1~65:3 5的範圍, 更佳爲95:5〜7 5:25的範圍。Xc之p係〇~1〇。XC可爲複數之 單體單位》The moir composition ratio of ma and Xb is preferably in the range of 99:1 to 65:3 5 , more preferably in the range of 95:5 to 7 5:25. Xc's p system is ~1〇. XC can be a plural monomer unit

Xa的莫耳組成比較多時,雖然與纖維素酯之相溶性較 佳,但薄膜厚度方向之延遲値Rth會變大。Xb之莫耳組成 比較多時,上述相溶性會變差,但降低Rth之效果較高。When the molar composition of Xa is relatively large, although the compatibility with the cellulose ester is good, the retardation 値Rth in the thickness direction of the film becomes large. When the composition of the Mob of Xb is relatively large, the compatibility is deteriorated, but the effect of lowering Rth is high.

Xb之莫耳組成比超過上述範圍時,在製膜時有產生霧 度的傾向,爲了此等之最佳化,較佳爲決定X a ·· Xb之莫耳 組成比。 高分子量之聚合物X的分子量係重量平均分子量5000 以上30000以下,更佳爲8000以上25000以下。 重量平均分子量設定爲5000以上,可得到光學補償薄 膜於高溫高濕下之尺寸變化較少,作爲偏光板保護薄膜時 捲曲較少等優點,故較佳。 重量平均分子量爲30000以下時,可提高與纖維素酯 之相溶性,可抑制於高溫高濕下之滲出,且可抑制於剛製 膜後之霧度產生。 本發明使用之聚合物X之重量平均分子量可由公知的 分子量調節方法調整。這種分子量調節方法例如有添加四 氯化碳、月桂基硫醇、毓基乙酸辛酯等連鏈移動劑的方法 等。 聚合溫度一般爲室溫至130 °C,較佳爲50 °C至100 °C下 -51 - 201106060 進行,但可調整此溫度或聚合反應時間。 平均分子量之測定方法係在(3.1.1)中,可使用上述 的方法。 本發明所使用之低分子量的聚合物Y爲不具有芳香環 之乙烯性不飽和單體Ya進行聚合所得之重量平均分子量 5 00以上3 000以下的聚合物。重量平均分子量5〇0以上時, 聚合物的殘留單體會減少,故較佳。 又,3 0 0 0以下時,可維持延遲値R t h降低性能,故較 佳。Ya較佳爲不具有芳香環之丙烯酸或甲基丙燃酸單體。 本發明使用之聚合物Y係以下述一般式(Y)表示。 —般式(Y) -[Ya]k-[Yb]q- 上述一般式(Y )中,Ya係表示不具有芳香環之乙烯 性不飽和單體,Yb係表示可與Ya共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單 體。k及q係分別表示莫耳組成比。但是wo、q#〇、 k+q=100 〇 本發明使用之聚合物Y,更佳爲下述一般式(Y-l)表 示的聚合物。 —般式(Υ-1 ) -[CH2-C(-R5) (-CO2R6) ]k-[Yb]q- 上述一般式(Y-l )中’ R5係分別表示氫原子或甲基 。R6係表示碳數卜:^之烷基或環烷基。Yb係表示可與 [CH2-C(-R5) ( -C02R6 )]共聚合之單體單位。k及q係分 別表示莫耳組成比。但是k#〇、q#0、k + q=100。 -52- 201106060When the molar composition ratio of Xb exceeds the above range, haze tends to occur during film formation, and for optimization of these, it is preferred to determine the molar composition ratio of X a ·· Xb. The molecular weight of the high molecular weight polymer X is 5,000 or more and 30,000 or less, more preferably 8,000 or more and 25,000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight is set to 5,000 or more, it is preferable that the optical compensation film has a small dimensional change under high temperature and high humidity and has less curl as a polarizing plate protective film. When the weight average molecular weight is 30,000 or less, the compatibility with the cellulose ester can be improved, the bleeding under high temperature and high humidity can be suppressed, and the haze immediately after the film formation can be suppressed. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer X used in the present invention can be adjusted by a known molecular weight adjustment method. Such a method of adjusting the molecular weight includes, for example, a method of adding a chain shifting agent such as carbon tetrachloride, lauryl mercaptan or octyl thioglycolate. The polymerization temperature is usually from room temperature to 130 ° C, preferably from 50 ° C to 100 ° C -51 - 201106060, but the temperature or polymerization time can be adjusted. The method for determining the average molecular weight is in (3.1.1), and the above method can be used. The low molecular weight polymer Y used in the present invention is a polymer having a weight average molecular weight of from 500 to 3,000 or less obtained by polymerization of an ethylenically unsaturated monomer Ya having no aromatic ring. When the weight average molecular weight is 5 Å or more, the residual monomer of the polymer is reduced, which is preferable. Further, when the temperature is below 3,000, the delay 値R t h can be maintained, which is preferable. Ya is preferably an acrylic or methacrylic acid monomer having no aromatic ring. The polymer Y used in the present invention is represented by the following general formula (Y). - (Y) - [Ya]k - [Yb] q - In the above general formula (Y), Ya represents an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having no aromatic ring, and Yb represents an ethylene copolymerizable with Ya Sexually unsaturated monomer. k and q represent the molar composition ratio, respectively. However, wo, q#〇, k+q = 100 聚合物 The polymer Y used in the present invention is more preferably a polymer represented by the following general formula (Y-1). - General formula (Υ-1) -[CH2-C(-R5) (-CO2R6) ]k-[Yb]q- In the above general formula (Y-1), 'R5' represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, respectively. R6 represents an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group of a carbon number. Yb represents a monomer unit copolymerizable with [CH2-C(-R5)(-C02R6)]. The k and q systems respectively indicate the molar composition ratio. But k#〇, q#0, k + q=100. -52- 201106060

Yb只要是可與Ya之[CH2-C ( -R5 ) ( -C〇2r6 )]共聚 合之乙嫌性不飽和單體時’無特別限定。Y b可爲複數。 k+q=100 , q較佳爲 1~30 〇 構成不具芳香環之乙烯性不飽和單體經聚合所得之聚 合物Y的乙燃性不飽和單體Ya爲两嫌酸酯時,例如有丙嫌 酸甲酯、丙烯酸乙酯、丙烯酸丙酯(i_、n_)、丙嫌酸丁 酯(n-、i-、s-、t-)、丙烯酸戊酯(n-、i-、s-)、丙烯 酸己酯(n-、i-)、丙烯酸庚酯(n_、i_)、丙烯酸辛酯( n-、i-)、丙煤酸壬酯(n-、i-)、丙稀酸十四院酯(n_、 i_)、丙烯酸環己基、丙烯酸(2 -乙基己酯)、丙烯酸( ε-己內酯)、丙烯酸(2-羥基乙酯)、丙烯酸(2-羥基丙 酯)、丙烯酸(3-羥基丙酯)、丙烯酸(4_羥基丁酯)、 丙烯酸(2-羥基丁酯):甲基丙烯酸酯時,例如有爲將上 述丙烯酸酯改變成甲基丙烯酸酯者;不飽和酸時,例如有 丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、馬來酸酐、巴豆酸、衣康酸等。Yb is not particularly limited as long as it is a B-unsaturated monomer copolymerizable with [CH2-C(-R5)(-C〇2r6)] of Ya. Y b can be a complex number. k+q=100 , q is preferably 1 to 30 〇 When the ethylenically unsaturated monomer Ya of the polymer Y obtained by polymerizing the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having no aromatic ring is a two-acidic acid ester, for example, Methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate (i_, n_), butyl citrate (n-, i-, s-, t-), amyl acrylate (n-, i-, s- ), hexyl acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl acrylate (n_, i_), octyl acrylate (n-, i-), decyl hexanoate (n-, i-), acrylic acid Tetraester (n_, i_), cyclohexyl acrylate, (2-ethylhexyl acrylate), acrylic acid (ε-caprolactone), acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl ester), acrylic acid (2-hydroxypropyl ester), When (3-hydroxypropyl) acrylate, (4-hydroxybutyl acrylate), (2-hydroxybutyl acrylate): methacrylate, for example, the above acrylate is changed to methacrylate; unsaturated Examples of the acid include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, crotonic acid, itaconic acid and the like.

Yb只要是可與Ya共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體時,即無 特別限定’乙烯酯例如有較佳爲乙酸乙烯酯、丙酸乙烯酯 、丁酸乙烯酯、戊酸乙烯酯、三甲基乙酸乙烯酯、己酸乙 烯酯、癸酸乙烯酯、十二烷酸乙烯酯、十四烷酸乙烯酯、 十六烷酸乙烯酯、硬脂酸乙烯酯、環己烷羧酸乙烯酯、辛 酸乙烯酯、甲基丙烯酸乙烯酯、巴豆酸乙烯酯、山梨酸乙 烯酯、肉桂酸乙烯酯等。Yb可爲複數。 合成聚合物X、Y時,一般的聚合很難控制分子量, 以不會使分子量過大的方法,且儘可能使分子量整齊一致 -53- 201106060 的方法爲佳。 此種聚合方法例如有使用如枯烯過氧化物或第三丁基 氫過氧化物之過氧化物聚合起始劑的方法、使用比一般的 聚合更多量之聚合起始劑的方法、除聚合起始劑外使用氫 硫基化合物或四氯化碳等連鏈移動劑的方法、除聚合起始 劑外使用如苯醌或二硝基苯之聚合抑制劑的方法、尙有使 用如日本特開2000- 1 289 1 1號或日本特開2000-3 448 2 3號公 報之具有1個硫醇與2級羥基的化合物、或倂用該化合物與 有機金屬化合物之聚合觸媒的塊狀聚合方法等,皆可用於 本發明。 特別,聚合物Y是以分子中具有硫醇基與2級羥基之化 合物作爲連鏈移動劑使用的聚合方法爲佳。此時,聚合物 γ的末端成爲具有因聚合觸媒及連鏈移動劑所產生的羥基 、硫醚。可藉此末端殘基調整聚合物Y與纖維素酯的相溶 性。 聚合物X及Y的羥基價較佳爲30〜150[mgKOH/g]。 (羥基價的測定方法) 羥基價的測定係依據ns K 0070 ( 1992)。此羥基價 係定義爲將試料1 g進行乙醯基化時1中和與羥基結合之乙 酸所需之氫氧化鉀的mg數。 具體而言,於燒瓶中精秤試料Xg (約1 g )後,於其中 正確添加乙醯基化試藥(乙酸酐20ml中添加吡啶成爲 400ml者)20ml。燒瓶口裝設空氣冷卻管,以95〜100 °C的 -54- 201106060 甘油浴加熱。1小時3 〇分後,進行冷卻,由空氣冷卻管添 加純水1 ml,使乙酸酐分解成乙酸。 其次’使用電位差滴定裝置,以〇.5mol/L氫氧化鉀乙 醇溶液進行滴定,所得之滴定曲線之反曲點(inflection point )當作終點。 空白試驗爲以不添加試料進行滴定,得到滴定曲線之 反曲點。羥基價係藉由下式計算得到。Yb is not particularly limited as long as it is an ethylenically unsaturated monomer copolymerizable with Ya. For example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinyl butyrate, vinyl valerate, and trimethyl ester are preferable. Vinyl acetate, vinyl hexanoate, vinyl decanoate, vinyl dodecanoate, vinyl myristate, vinyl hexadecanate, vinyl stearate, vinyl cyclohexanecarboxylate, Vinyl octoate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl crotonate, vinyl sorbate, vinyl cinnamate, and the like. Yb can be plural. In the case of synthesizing polymers X and Y, it is difficult to control the molecular weight in general polymerization, and it is preferable to use a method in which the molecular weight is not excessively large and the molecular weight is as uniform as possible -53-201106060. Such a polymerization method is, for example, a method using a peroxide polymerization initiator such as cumene peroxide or a third butyl hydroperoxide, a method of using a polymerization initiator in a larger amount than a general polymerization, and A method of using a chain transfer agent such as a hydrogenthio compound or carbon tetrachloride in addition to a polymerization initiator, a method of using a polymerization inhibitor such as phenylhydrazine or dinitrobenzene in addition to a polymerization initiator, and a use such as Japan JP-A-2000- 1 289 1 1 or JP-A-2000-3448 2 3, a compound having one thiol and a hydroxy group, or a lumps of a polymerization catalyst of the compound and an organometallic compound. A polymerization method or the like can be used in the present invention. In particular, the polymer Y is preferably a polymerization method in which a compound having a thiol group and a hydroxy group in the molecule is used as a chain shifting agent. At this time, the terminal of the polymer γ has a hydroxyl group or a thioether which is generated by a polymerization catalyst and a chain shifting agent. The terminal residue can be used to adjust the compatibility of the polymer Y with the cellulose ester. The valence of the hydroxyl groups of the polymers X and Y is preferably from 30 to 150 [mgKOH/g]. (Method for measuring hydroxyl value) The measurement of the hydroxyl value is based on ns K 0070 (1992). The hydroxyl value is defined as the number of mg of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acetic acid bonded to the hydroxyl group when 1 g of the sample is subjected to oximation. Specifically, after the Xg (about 1 g) of the sample was weighed in a flask, 20 ml of an acetamidine reagent (a pyridine was added to 20 ml of acetic anhydride to 400 ml) was appropriately added thereto. The air inlet tube of the flask is equipped with a -54-201106060 glycerin bath heated at 95~100 °C. After 1 hour and 3 minutes, cooling was carried out, and 1 ml of pure water was added from the air cooling tube to decompose acetic anhydride into acetic acid. Next, using a potentiometric titration apparatus, titration was carried out with a solution of mol5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol, and the inflection point of the obtained titration curve was taken as the end point. The blank test is to titrate without adding a sample, and the inflection point of the titration curve is obtained. The hydroxyl number is calculated by the following formula.

羥基價={(B-C) xfx28.05/X}+D 式中’ B係表示空白試驗所使用之0.5 mo 1/L之氫氧化 鉀乙醇溶液的量(ml),(:係表示用於滴定之0.5mol/L之 氫氧化鉀乙醇溶液的量(ml ) ,f係表示〇.5mol/L氫氧化鉀 乙醇溶液的參數(f a c t 〇 r ) ,D表示酸價,此外,2 8 · 0 5係 表示氫氧化鉀之lmol量56.11的1/2 » 上述聚合物X、聚合物Y均與纖維素酯之相溶性優異 、無蒸發或揮發’生產性優異,作爲偏光板用保護薄膜之 保留性佳、透濕度小、尺寸安定性優異。 聚合物X與聚合物γ之光學補償薄膜中的含量係當聚 合物X的含量爲Xg (質量%=(聚合物X之質量/纖維素酯之 質量)X 100 ’聚合物γ的含量爲Yg (質量% )時,較佳爲 滿足下述式(i)、式(ii)的範圍者。 式(i ) 5 SXg + Yg^35 (質量 % ) 式(ii) 0.05 客 Yg/ ( Xg + Yg) ^0.4 式(i)之(Xg + Yg)的較佳範圍爲1〇〜35質量%。 聚合物X與聚合物γ係相對於纖維素酯全質量,以總 -55- 201106060 量表示爲5質量%以上時,對於調整延遲値Rth有充分的作 用。此外,以總量表示爲35質量%以下時,與偏光子PVA 之黏著性優良。 聚合物X與聚合物Y係作爲構成後述之膠漿液之原料 ,可直接添加、溶解,或預先溶解於溶解有纖維素酯之有 機溶劑後添加於膠漿液中。 (3.4 )紫外線吸收劑 第1 '第2光學補償層3、5可含有紫外線吸收劑。紫外 線吸收劑係吸收400nm以下的紫外線,以提高耐久性爲目 的,特別是波長370rim之透過率較佳爲1〇%以下,更佳爲 5%以下,更佳爲2%以下。 本發明所使用之紫外線吸收劑並無特別限定,例如有 氧基二苯甲酮系化合物、苯並三唑系化合物、水楊酸酯系 化合物、二苯甲酮系化合物、氰丙烯酸酯系化合物、三嗪 系化合物、鎳錯鹽系化合物、無機粉體等。 例如有5-氯- 2-( 3,5-二-第二丁基-2-羥基苯基)-2H-苯並三唑、(2-2H-苯並三唑-2-基)-6-(直鏈及側鏈十二 基)-4-甲基苯酚、2-羥基-4-苄氧基二苯甲酮、2,4-苄氧基 二苯甲酮等,此外例如有Tinubinl09、Tinubinl71、 Tinubin234 、 Tinubin326 、 Tinubin327 、 Tinubin328 等之The hydroxyl value = {(BC) xfx28.05/X} + D where 'B is the amount (ml) of the 0.5 mol 1 / L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution used in the blank test, (: indicates that it is used for titration The amount of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution (ml), f is the parameter of 〇.5mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution (fact 〇r ), D is the acid value, in addition, 2 8 · 0 5 1/2 of the amount of 1 mol of the potassium hydroxide is 56.11. The polymer X and the polymer Y are excellent in compatibility with the cellulose ester, and are not evaporated or volatilized, and are excellent in productivity, and are retained as a protective film for a polarizing plate. Good, low moisture permeability and excellent dimensional stability. The content of polymer X and polymer γ in the optical compensation film is when the content of polymer X is Xg (% by mass = (mass of polymer X / mass of cellulose ester) When the content of X 100 'polymer γ is Yg (% by mass), it is preferably within the range of the following formulas (i) and (ii). Formula (i) 5 SXg + Yg^35 (% by mass) Formula (ii) 0.05 Yg / (Xg + Yg) ^0.4 The preferred range of (Xg + Yg) of the formula (i) is from 1 〇 to 35% by mass. The polymer X is compared with the polymer γ system. When the total mass of the vitamin ester is 5% by mass or more based on the total amount of -55 to 201106060, it has a sufficient effect on the adjustment delay 値Rth. Further, when the total amount is 35% by mass or less, adhesion to the polarizer PVA is obtained. The polymer X and the polymer Y are directly added, dissolved, or previously dissolved in an organic solvent in which a cellulose ester is dissolved, and are added to the dope as a raw material constituting the slurry described later. (3.4) Ultraviolet absorption The first optical accommodating layer 3 and 5 may contain an ultraviolet ray absorbing agent. The ultraviolet absorbing agent absorbs ultraviolet rays of 400 nm or less to improve durability, and in particular, the transmittance of a wavelength of 370 rim is preferably 1% or less. More preferably, it is 5% or less, and more preferably 2% or less. The ultraviolet absorber used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an oxybenzophenone-based compound, a benzotriazole-based compound, and a salicylate-based compound. a compound, a benzophenone-based compound, a cyanoacrylate-based compound, a triazine-based compound, a nickel-salted salt-based compound, an inorganic powder, etc. For example, 5-chloro-2-(3,5-di-second butyl) -2-hydroxyphenyl)- 2H-benzotriazole, (2-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-6-(linear and side chain dodecyl)-4-methylphenol, 2-hydroxy-4-benzyloxy Benzophenone, 2,4-benzyloxybenzophenone, etc., in addition, for example, Tinubinl09, Tinubinl71, Tinubin234, Tinubin326, Tinubin327, Tinubin328, etc.

Tinubin類,此等均爲Ciba Japan (股)公司製之市售品, 均可使用。 適合本發明使用之紫外線吸收劑係苯並三唑系紫外線 -56- 201106060 吸收劑、一苯甲酮系紫外線吸收劑'三嗪系紫外線吸收劑 ’特佳爲本並二哩系紫外線吸收劑、二苯甲酮系紫外線吸 收劑。 例如’本並二嗤系紫外線吸收劑可使用下述一般式( d )所示之化合物。 [化 17] -般式⑼The Tinubin class, which is a commercial product of Ciba Japan Co., Ltd., can be used. The ultraviolet absorber suitable for use in the present invention is a benzotriazole-based ultraviolet-56-201106060 absorbent, a benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorber, a triazine-based ultraviolet absorber, and a second-component ultraviolet absorber. Benzophenone UV absorber. For example, the compound represented by the following general formula (d) can be used as the present ultraviolet ray absorbing agent. [Chemistry 17] - General (9)

式中,R,、R2、R3、尺4及r5可相同或相異,表示氫原 子、鹵原子、硝基、羥基、烷基、烯基、芳基.·烷氧基、 醯氧基、芳氧基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基、單或二烷基胺基 、醯基胺基或5〜6員之雜環基,r4與!^5進行閉環可形成5〜6 員的碳環。 又,上述記載之此等之基可具有任意的取代基。 以下’例舉本發明所使用之苯並三唑系紫外線吸收劑 之具體例,但是本發明並非限定於此等。 UV-1:2- ( 2’-羥基- 5' -甲基苯基)苯並三唑 UV-2:2- (2、羥基- 3’’ 51-二第三丁基苯基)苯並三唑 UV-3:2-(2'-羥基- 3'-第三丁基- 5'-甲基苯基)苯並三 唑 UV-4:2-(2’-羥基- 3’,5’-二第三丁基苯基)·5-氯苯並 三哩 UV-5:2- ( 2’-羥基- 3’·( 3",4",5",6"-四氫苯二甲醯 -57- 201106060 亞胺甲基)-5'-甲基苯基)苯並三唑 1;¥-6:2,2-亞甲基雙(4-(1,1,3,3-四甲基丁基)-6-( 2H-苯並三唑-2-基)苯酚) UV-7:2- ( 2·-羥基- 3·-第三丁基-51-甲基苯基)-5-氯苯 並三唑 UV-8:2-(2H-苯並三唑-2-基)-6-(直鏈及側鏈十二 基)-4-甲基苯酚(TINUVIN 171) UV-9:辛基-3-〔 3-第三丁基-4-羥基-5-(氯- 2H-苯並三 唑-2-基)苯基〕丙酸酯與2-乙基己基-3-〔3-第三丁基-4-羥基- 5-( 5-氯-2H-苯並三唑-2-基)苯基〕丙酸酯之混合 物(TINUVIN 1 09 ) 此外,二苯甲酮系紫外線吸收劑較佳爲使用下述一般 式(e)表示之化合物。 [化 18] 一般式(β)Wherein R, R2, R3, 4 and R5 may be the same or different and represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, a decyloxy group, An aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a mono or dialkylamino group, a mercaptoamine group or a heterocyclic group of 5 to 6 members, r4 and ! ^5 performs a closed loop to form a carbon ring of 5 to 6 members. Further, the above-described groups may have any substituent. Specific examples of the benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorber used in the present invention are exemplified below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. UV-1: 2-( 2'-hydroxy-5'-methylphenyl)benzotriazole UV-2:2-(2, hydroxy-3'' 51-di-t-butylphenyl)benzo Triazole UV-3: 2-(2'-hydroxy-3'-tert-butyl-5'-methylphenyl)benzotriazole UV-4:2-(2'-hydroxy-3',5 '-Di-tert-butylphenyl)·5-chlorobenzotriazine UV-5:2-( 2'-hydroxy-3'·( 3",4",5",6"-tetrahydrobenzene Hyperthyroid-57- 201106060 imine methyl)-5'-methylphenyl)benzotriazole 1; ¥-6:2,2-methylenebis(4-(1,1,3,3- Tetramethylbutyl)-6-( 2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)phenol) UV-7:2-( 2·-hydroxy-3·-t-butyl-51-methylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole UV-8: 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-6-(linear and side chain dodecyl)-4-methylphenol (TINUVIN 171) UV -9: Octyl-3-[3-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-(chloro-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)phenyl]propionate and 2-ethylhexyl-3 a mixture of [3-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-(5-chloro-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)phenyl]propionate (TINUVIN 1 09 ) In addition, benzophenone The ultraviolet absorber is preferably represented by the following general formula (e) Compound. General formula (β)

式中’ Y係表示示氫原子' 鹵原子或烷基、烯基、烷 氧基及苯基,此等烷基、烯基及苯基可具有取代基。A係 表示氫原子、烷基、烯基、苯基、環烷基、烷基羰基、烷 基磺醯基或- CO(NH) „-1-d基,D係表示烷基、烯基或可 具有取代基之苯基。Μ及n係表示1或2。 上述中’院基例如有表示碳數24爲止之直鏈或支鏈的 脂肪族基’而烷氧基例如有表示碳數18爲止之烷氧基,烯 -58- 201106060 基例如有表示碳數16爲止之烯基、烯丙基、2-丁烯基等。 又’烷基 '烯基、苯基之取代基,其中鹵原子例如有氯原 子、漠原子、氟原子等、羥基、苯基(此苯基可爲烷基或 鹵原子等取代)等。 以下表示一般式(e)所示之二苯甲酮系紫外線吸收 劑的具體例,但是本發明並非限定於此等。 υν·10:2,4-二羥基二苯甲酮 ϋν·1 1 :2,2’-二羥基-4-甲氧基二苯甲酮 UV-12:2-羥基-4-甲氧基-5-磺基二苯甲酮 UV-13··雙(2-甲氧基_4-羥基-5-苯酿基苯基甲烷) 此外,具有1,3,5-三嗪環之化合物等的圓盤狀化合物 也適合可作爲紫外線吸收劑使用。 本發明之第1、第2光學補償薄膜3,5可含有2種以上 之紫外線吸收劑爲佳。 又,紫外線吸收劑使用高分子紫外線吸收劑較佳,特 佳爲使用日本特開平6- 1 4843 0號記載之聚合物型的紫外線 吸收劑。 紫外線吸收劑之添加方法係將紫外線吸收劑溶解於甲 醇、乙醇、丁醇等之醇或二氯甲烷、乙酸甲酯、丙酮,二 氧雜環戊垸(dioxol an e)等之有機溶劑或此等混合溶劑後 ,添加於膠漿中,或直接添加於膠漿組成中。如無機粉體 般不溶解於有機溶劑者,可在有機溶劑與纖維素酯中使用 溶解器或砂磨機分散後,添加於膠漿中。 紫外線吸收劑之使用量係依紫外線吸收劑的種類、使 -59- 201106060 用條件等而異,光學補償薄膜(光學補償層3,5 )之乾燥 膜厚爲30〜200μπι時’相對於光學補償薄膜,較佳爲〇.5〜10 質量%,更佳爲0.6〜4質量%。 (3.5氧化防止劑) 氧化防止劑也稱爲劣化防止劑。當液晶圖像顯示裝置 等處於高濕高溫的狀態時,有時作爲光學補償薄膜之第1 '第2光學補償層會產生劣化。氧化防止劑係具有例如減 緩或防止因光學補償薄膜中殘留溶劑量之鹵素或磷酸系可 塑劑之磷酸等,造成光學補償薄膜分解的功能,因此含於 前述光學補償薄膜中較佳。 此種防氧化劑較佳爲使用受阻酚系的化合物,例如有 2,6-二-第三丁基對甲酚、季戊四醇基-四〔3- (3,5-二-第 三丁基-4-羥基苯基)丙酸酯〕、三乙二醇-雙〔3-(3-第 三丁基-5·甲基-4-羥基苯基)丙酸酯〕、1,6-己二醇雙〔3-(3,5-二-第三丁基_4_羥基苯基)丙酸酯〕、2,4-雙·(正 辛基硫代)-6- (4-羥基-3,5-二-第三丁基苯胺基)-1,3,5-三嗪、2,2-硫代-二亞乙基雙〔3- ( 3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥 基苯基)丙酸酯〕、十八基- 3-(3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥基 苯基)丙酸酯、Ν,Ν’-亞己基雙(3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥基-氫肉桂醯胺)、1,3,5-三甲基-2,4,6-三(3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥基苄基)苯、三(3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥基苄基)-異 氰尿酸酯等。特佳爲2,6-二-第三丁基-對甲酚、季戊四醇 基-四〔3- (3,5 -二-第三丁基-4 -羥基苯基)丙酸酯〕、三 -60- 201106060 乙二醇雙〔3- (3-第三丁基-5-甲基-4-羥基苯基)丙酸酯 〕。又’可倂用例如N,N,-雙〔3- ( 3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥 基苯基)丙醯基〕肼等之肼系之金屬惰性劑或三(2,4-二-第三丁基苯基)亞磷酸酯(phosphite)等之磷系加工安定 劑。 此等化合物之添加量係相對於纖維素衍生物,以質量 比例表7K較佳爲lppm~1.0%,更佳爲10~1000ppm。 (3 · 6粒子) 本發明之第1、第2光學補償薄膜3,5較佳爲含有微粒 本發明所使用的微粒子,其中無機化合物例如有二氧 化矽、二氧化鈦、氧化鋁、氧化錐、碳酸鈣、滑石、黏土 '燒成陶土、燒成矽酸鈣、水合矽酸鈣、矽酸鋁、矽酸鎂 及磷酸鈣。微粒子係含有矽者濁度變低,故較佳,特佳爲 二氧化矽。 微粒子之一次粒子的平均粒徑較佳爲5〜400nm,更佳 爲10〜300nm。此等可含有主要粒徑0·05~0.3μιη的2次凝聚 物,平均粒徑10 0~4 0 0 nm的粒子時,不會凝集,也可含有 作爲一次粒子。光學補償薄膜3、5中之此等微粒子的含量 較佳爲0.01-1質量%,特佳爲〇.〇5〜0.5質量%。藉由共流延 法之多層構成的光學補償薄膜3、5時,在表面含有此添加 量的微粒子較佳。 二氧化矽的微粒子可使用例如以AEROSIL R972、 -61 - 201106060 R972V、R974、R812、200、200V、300、R202、0X50、 TT600 (以上日本AEROSIL (股)製)的商品名販售者。 氧化銷的微粒子可使用例如以A E R Ο S IL R 9 7 6及R 8 1 1 (以上日本AEROSIL (股)製)的商品名販售者。 聚合物例如有聚矽氧烷樹脂、氟樹脂及丙烯酸樹脂。 較佳爲聚矽氧烷樹脂,特佳爲具有三維的網狀構造者,可 使用例如以 Tospear 103、Tospear 105、Tospear 108、 Tospear 120、Tospear 145、Tospear 3120及 Tospear 2 4 0 ( 以上爲東芝聚矽氧烷(股)製)的商品名市售者。 其中,AEROSIL 200V、AEROSIL R972V保持低光學 補償薄膜的濁度,而且降低摩擦係數的效果大,故特別適 用。本發明使用之光學補償薄膜3、5之至少一之面的動摩 擦係數較佳爲0.2〜1.0。 各種添加劑可分批添加於含有製膜前之纖維素酯的溶 液的膠漿中,或另外準備添加劑溶解液,進行聯機(in line )添加。特別是爲了減少微粒子對過濾材之負荷,以 一部份或全量進行聯機添加較佳。 添加劑溶解液進行聯機添加時,爲了提高與膠漿之混 合性,以溶解少量纖維素酯者爲佳。較佳之纖維素酯的量 係相對於溶劑100質量份爲1~10質量份,較佳爲3〜5質量份 〇 本發明中,爲了進行聯機添加、混合,較佳爲使用例 如靜態型混合攪拌器(Tor ay工程公司製)、SWJ ( To ray 靜止型管內混合器Hi-Mixer)等的聯機混合器等。 -62- 201106060 (3.7)光學補償薄膜之製造方法 其次’說明本發明之第1、第2光學補償層3、5之光學 補償薄膜的製造方法。 光學補償薄膜可使用以溶液流延法所製造的薄膜,或 以溶融流延法所製造的薄膜。 本發明之光學補償薄膜之製造係藉由以下的步驟來進 行,將纖維素酯及添加劑溶解於溶劑中以調製膠漿(dope )的步驟’將膠漿流延至無限移動之循環金屬支持體上的 步驟,使流延的膠漿以纖維網(web)進行乾燥的步驟, 從金屬支持體剝離的步驟、延伸或寬度保持的步驟、再進 一步乾燥之步驟、捲取加工完成的薄膜之步驟。 說明調製膠漿的步驟。膠漿中之纖維素酯的濃度係雖 然較濃者可減低流延在金屬支持體上後的乾燥負荷,故較 佳’但若纖維素酯的濃度太濃時,過濾時的負荷增加,過 濾精度變差。兼具此等的濃度,較佳爲10〜3 5質量%,更佳 爲15〜25質量%。 膠漿所用的溶劑可單獨使用或可倂用2種以上,但從 生產效率的觀點,較佳爲混合使用纖維素酯的良溶劑與不 良溶劑,從纖維素酯的溶解性的觀點,良溶劑較多者爲佳 。良溶劑與不良溶劑的混合比率之較佳範圍係良溶劑爲 70〜98質量%,不良溶劑爲2〜30質量% »所謂的良溶劑、不 良溶劑係指能單獨溶解所使用之纖維素酯者定義爲良溶劑 ,單獨產生膨潤或不能溶解者定義爲不良溶劑。因此,因 -63- 201106060 纖維素酯之平均乙醯化度(乙醯基取代度)時,良溶劑、 不良溶劑會改變,例如以丙酮作爲溶劑使用時,在纖維素 酯之乙酸酯(乙醯基取代度2.4)、纖維素乙酸酯丙酸醋 成爲良溶劑,而纖維素之乙酸酯(乙醯基取代度2.8 )則 成爲不良溶劑》 本發明使用之良溶劑無特別限定,例如有二氯甲院等 之有機鹵化合物或二氧雜環戊烷類、丙酮、醋酸甲醋、乙 醯醋酸甲酯等。特佳爲二氯甲烷或醋酸甲酯。 又,本發明使用之不良溶劑無特別限定,例如較爲使 用甲醇 '乙醇、正丁醇、環己院、環己酮等。又,於膠發 中較佳爲含有0.01〜2質量%的水。另外,纖維素酯之溶解 時所用的溶劑係回收在薄膜製膜步驟,藉由乾燥由薄膜中 去除的溶劑,將此再利用來使用。回收溶劑中,可含有微 量之添加於纖維素酯的添加劑,例如可塑劑、紫外線吸收 劑、聚合物、單體成分等,但即含有此等也可再利用,且 必要時可純化後再利用。 調製上述記載之膠漿時之纖維素酯的溶解方法,可使 用一般的方法。組合加熱與加壓時,可加熱至常壓之沸點 以上。以溶劑之常壓下的沸點以上,且加壓下溶劑不會沸 騰之範圍的溫度進行加熱同時攪拌溶解時,因爲可防止凝 膠或被稱爲mamaco的塊狀未溶解物的發生,故較佳。此外 ,較佳爲使用將纖維素酯與不良溶劑混合而使其濕、潤或膨 潤後,再添加良溶劑進行溶解的方法。 加壓可藉由壓入氮氣等惰性氣體的方法、或n $力口 @ -64- 201106060 使溶劑之蒸氣壓上昇的方法來進行加壓。加熱係 行者爲佳,例如夾套型者因容易控制溫度,故較1 添加溶劑之加熱溫度係從纖維素酯之溶解性 較高者較佳,但是加熱溫度過高時,因必須的壓 生產性變差。較佳加熱溫度爲45〜120°c,更佳爲 ,更佳爲70°C〜l〇5t。又,壓力可調整至在設定 溶劑不會沸騰的狀態。 或也可使用冷卻溶解法,藉此可使纖維素酯 酸甲酯等的溶劑中。 接著,使用濾紙等適當的過濾材過濾此纖維 。過濾材爲了去除不溶物等,較佳爲使用絕對過 小者,但是絕對過濾精度過小時,有過濾材容易 的問題。因此,較佳爲絕對過濾精度〇.〇〇8mm以 ,更佳爲0.001〜〇.〇〇8mm的濾材,更佳爲0.003〜0 濾材。 濾材的材質無特別限定,可使用通常的濾材 丙烯、鐵弗龍(註冊商標)等的塑膠製濾材、或 的金屬製濾材因無纖維脫落等,故較佳。藉由過 降低原料之纖維素酯中所含有的雜質,特別是亮 佳。 所謂的亮點異物係指將2片偏光板以正交尼 配置,其中間放置光學薄膜等,從一方的偏光板 線,由另一方的偏光板側觀察時,因從相反側之 可看見的點(異物)’直徑爲〇·〇1 mm以上的亮點 由外部進 ί圭。 的觀點, 力變大, 6 0 ~ 1 1 0 〇C 溫度,且 溶解於醋 素酯溶液 濾精度較 發生阻塞 下的濾材 • 006mm 的 ,但是聚 不銹鋼等 濾去除、 點異物較 科耳狀態 側照射光 漏光,而 數較佳爲 -65- 201106060 200個/cm2以下。更佳爲100個/cm2以下,更佳爲50個/m2以 下,特佳爲0〜10個/cm2以下。此外,0.01mm以下的亮點也 以較少者爲佳。 膠漿的過濾可藉由通常的方法來進行,但是在溶劑之 常壓之沸點以上’且在加壓下溶劑不會沸騰之範圍之溫度 進行加熱,同時過濾的方法,其過濾前後之液壓差(稱爲 差壓)之上升較小較佳。較佳的溫度爲4 5〜1 2 0。(:,更佳爲 45〜70°C,更佳爲45〜55°C。 濾壓係較小較佳。濾壓較佳爲1.6 MPa以下,更佳爲 1.2MPa以下,更佳爲l.OMPa以下。 在此說明膠漿的流延。 流延(cast )步驟中的金屬支持體較佳爲表面經鏡面 加工者’金屬支持體可使用不銹鋼帶或鑄物的表面經鍍層 加工的滾筒。流延的寬度可爲l〜4m。流延步驟之金屬支持 體的表面溫度爲-5 0 °C ~未達溶劑之沸點的溫度,而溫度較 高時’可使纖維網的乾燥速度變快,較理想,但若溫度太 高時’纖維網會發泡,或平面性會變差。較佳的支持體溫 度爲〇~40°C,更佳爲5〜30°C。或藉由冷卻使纖維網凝膠化 ’在含有許多殘留溶劑的狀態下,從滾筒剝離的方法也爲 理想的方法。控制金屬支持體之溫度的方法無特別限定, 有噴吹熱風或冷風的方法,或使溫水接觸金屬支持體的內 側的方法。使用熱水者由於可有效地進行熱傳導,因此可 縮短金屬支持體之溫度到達一定爲止的時間,故較佳。使 用熱風時,有時使用比目的之溫度更高溫度的風。 -66 - 201106060 爲了使光學補償薄膜顯示良好的平面性,從金屬支持 體剝離纖維網時之殘留溶劑量較佳爲1 〇〜1 5 0質量%,更佳 爲20〜40質量%或60〜130質量%,特佳爲20〜30質量%或 7 0〜120質量%。 本發明中,殘留溶劑量係以下述式所定義。 殘留溶劑量(質量%) ={(Μ-Ν) /Ν}χ100 此外,Μ係纖維網或薄膜在製造中或製造後之任意時 間點所採取的試料的質量,Ν係將Μ以1 1 5 °C加熱1小時後的 質量。 此外,光學補償薄膜的乾燥步驟中,將纖維網從金屬 支持體剝離,再經乾燥,使殘留溶劑量爲1質量%以下者較 佳,更佳爲0.1質量%以下,特佳爲0〜0.01質量%以下。 薄膜乾燥步驟一般採用以滾筒乾燥方式(將纖維網交 互地通過配置於上下的多數滾筒,使其乾燥的方式)或以 拉幅器方式搬送纖維網同時乾燥的方式。 此時,製造作爲第1光學補償層3之光學補償薄膜時, 將收縮性薄膜貼合於乾燥之纖維素系樹脂薄膜上,進行延 伸同時收縮較佳。 製造作爲第2光學補償層5之光學補償薄膜時,進行二 軸延伸處理較佳。 製作本發明之光學補償薄膜時,以用夾具等夾持纖維 網之兩端之拉幅器方式,在寬方向(橫方向)進行延伸特 佳。剝離張力係以3〇〇N/m以下進行剝離較佳。 使纖維網乾燥的手段並沒有特別制限,一般可使用熱 -67- 201106060 風、紅外線、加熱滾筒、微波等進行乾燥,但以簡便的觀 點,以熱風乾燥較佳。 纖維網之乾燥步驟中的乾燥溫度係40〜200t,且以段 階地提高較佳。 光學補償薄膜的膜厚並沒有特別限制,可使用 10〜200μηΐ。特別是膜厚爲1〇~1〇〇μπι較佳。更佳爲20〜60μηι 〇 本發明之光學補償薄膜可使用寬度l~4m者。特別是使 用寬度1.4〜4m者爲佳,特佳爲1.6〜3m。超過4m時,搬運變 困難。 依據以上的液晶顯示裝置1時,液晶胞4中之液晶分子 係在黑顯示時,配向於該液晶胞4之厚度方向,而第1及第 2光學補償層 3、5係滿足 nxl>nzl>nyl、nx22ny2>nz2、 DSP(Rol) <1 <DSP ( Rth2 ),因此視角擴大,提高正面 對比,可防止由斜方向觀看時之色彩偏移(參照實施例) 〇 上述第1實施形態係將本發明之液晶顯示裝置以圖1 ( a )所示的液晶顯示裝置1來說明,但是可爲圖1 ( b )所示 的液晶顯示裝置1 A。其中,圖1 ( b )之液晶顯示裝置1 A 係由辨識側朝背光側,依序層合第1偏光子2、第1光學補 償層3、液晶胞4、第2光學補償層5'第2偏光子6,而第1 偏光子2之吸收軸2】與第1光學補償層3之遲相軸3〗平行, 而第1偏光子2之吸收軸2】與第2偏光子6之吸收軸6〗正交, 而第1光學補償層3之遲相軸3J與第2偏光子6之吸收軸6J成 -68 - 201106060 爲正交的狀態來配設。但是此圖1 (b)中,背光係在圖中 之下側,但是也可爲上側。 [第2實施形態] 其次,說明本發明之第2實施形態。對於與上述第1實 施形態同樣的構成要素,賦予相同的符号,其說明予以省 略。 圖2 (a)係表示本發明之其他液晶顯示裝置1D之槪略 構成的槪念圖。 如此圖所示,液晶顯示裝置1 D係由辨識側朝背光側, 以依下述順序層合的狀態具有第1偏光子2、第1光學補償 層3D、液晶胞4、第2光學補償層5、第2偏光子6。第1光學 補償層3D係由辨識側朝背光側,依序具有二軸性薄膜(基 材薄膜)30與液晶層3 1。 更詳細而言,第1偏光子2、第2偏光子6及二軸性薄膜 3〇係第1偏光子2之吸收軸2J與二軸性薄膜30之遲相軸30J 正交,而第1偏光子2之吸收軸2J與第2偏光子6之吸收軸6J 正交,而二軸性薄膜30之遲相軸30〗與第2偏光子6之吸收 軸6 J成爲平行的狀態來配設。圖2中,背光係在圖中之下 側,但是也可爲上側。 (第1光學補償層) 本實施形態之第1光學補償層3 D係具有二軸性薄膜3 0 及液晶層3 0,進行層合所構成,整體滿足η X 1 > η z 1 > n y 1、 -69- 201106060 DSP (Rol) <1,換言之,成爲所謂的逆波長分散之Z板。 此第1光學補償層3D係較佳爲面內之延遲値Rol爲 50〜100nm,厚度方向之延遲値Rthl之絕對値爲0nm~20nm 〇 此第1光學補償層3 D的形態無特別限定,較佳爲薄膜 。薄膜之厚度d較佳爲40~100μηι,更佳爲40〜70μηι。 <二軸性薄膜> 二軸性薄膜30係折射率滿足nx>ny>nZ的薄膜。這種二 軸性薄膜30可使用對於與上述第1實施形態之第1光學補償 層3同樣的纖維素系樹脂薄膜,實施延伸處理者。 <中間層> 本發明之光學補償層3D係於二軸性薄膜30與液晶層3 1 之間可設置補助液晶之垂直配向的中間層(配向膜。無圖 示)。 本發明之中間層係以透明樹脂所構成。透明樹脂較佳 爲具有飽和烴鏈或聚醚鏈作爲主鏈的黏結劑聚合物,更佳 爲具有飽和烴鏈作爲主鏈的黏結劑聚合物。 特佳爲藉由如紫外線或電子線之活性線照射,經過交 聯反應等產生硬化的樹脂、或交聯劑與具有反應部位之樹 脂的混合組成物。 硬化性樹脂較佳爲使用例如有紫外線硬化型胺基甲酸 乙酯丙烯酸酯系樹脂、紫外線硬化型聚酯丙烯酸酯系樹脂 -70- 201106060 、紫外線硬化型環氧丙烯酸酯系樹脂、紫外線硬 醇丙烯酸酯系樹脂或紫外線硬化型環氧樹脂等之 化型丙烯酸酯系樹脂。 紫外線硬化型丙烯酸酯系樹脂一般係使聚酯 異氰酸酯單體或預聚物反應所得之生成物再與2_ 丙烯酸酯' 2-羥基乙基甲基丙烯酸酯(以下,丙 包含甲基丙烯酸酯,而僅以丙烯酸酯表示)、2_ 丙烯酸酯等之具有羥基之丙烯酸酯系的單體進行 易製得。 可使用例如日本特開昭5 9 -1 5 1 1 1 0號所記載 爲使用例如紫光UV-7510B (日本合成化學(股 Unidick 1 7-806 (大日本油墨(股)製) CORONET L (日本聚胺甲酸乙酯(股)製)1份 等。 紫外線硬化型聚酯丙烯酸酯系樹脂,一般例 酯多元醇與2-羥基乙基丙烯酸酯、2-羥基丙烯酸 體反應時可容易形成者,可使用日本特開昭59-所記載者。 紫外線硬化型環氧丙烯酸酯系樹脂之具體例 以環氧丙烯酸酯爲寡聚物,此寡聚物中添加反應 、光聚合物引發劑產生反應而生成者,可使用曰 1 - 1 05 7 3 8號所記載者。 紫外線硬化型多元醇丙烯酸酯系樹脂之具體 有三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、二-三羥甲基丙烷 化型多元 紫外線硬 多元醇與 羥基乙基 烯酸酯中 羥基丙基 反應而容 者。較佳 )製)、 100份與 之混合物 如有使聚 酯系之單 1 5 1 1 1 2 號 ,例如有 性稀釋劑 本特開平 例,例如 四丙烯酸 -71 - 201106060 酯' 季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、二季戊 四醇六丙烯酸酯、烷基改性二季戊四醇五丙烯酸酯等。 此等硬化性樹脂之光聚合引發劑,具體而言,例如有 苯偶因及其衍生物、乙醯苯、二苯甲酮、羥基二苯甲酮、 米蛋酮、α -阿米羅基酯(α-Amyloxim ester)、噻噸酮等 及此等之衍生物。可與光增感劑一同使用。 使用環氧丙烯酸酯系之光聚合引發劑時,可使用正丁 胺、三乙胺、三-正丁基膦等的增感劑。 硬化性樹脂組成物所使用之光聚合引發劑或光增感劑 係相對於該組成物1 0 0質量份爲0.1〜2 5質量份,較佳爲 1〜〗5質量份》 丙烯酸酯系樹脂例如有甲基丙烯酸酯、乙基丙烯酸酯 、丁基丙烯酸酯、苄基丙烯酸酯、環己基丙烯酸酯、乙二 醇二丙烯酸酯 '丙二醇二丙烯酸酯、二乙烯苯、1,4-環己 烷二丙烯酸酯、1 ,4-環己基二甲基二丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基 丙烷三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯等。 此等之市售品可適當選擇使用例如Adeca optomer KR • B Y 系歹IJ :KR-400、KR-410、KR-5 5 0、KR-5 66、KR-5 67、 8丫-3208(旭電化(股)製);1<:〇611^4八-101-1<:1<:、八-101-WS、C-3 02、C-401-N、C-501、M-101、M-102、T-102、D-102、NS- 101、FT-102Q8、MAG-1-P20、AG-106 、M-101-C (廣榮化學(股)製); SEIKABEAM PHC22 1 0 ( S ) ' PHCX-9 ( K-3 ) ' PHC22 1 3 ' DP-1 0 ' DP- 20 、DP-30 ' P 1 000 、 P 1 1 00 、 P 1 200 、 P 1 3 00 、 P 1400 、 -72- 201106060 P1500、P1600、SCR9 00(大日精化工業(股)製); KRM703 3 、 KRM703 9 、 KRM7130 、 KRM713 1 、 UVECRYL2920 1、U V E C R Y L 2 9 2 0 2 ( D a i c e 1 · U C B (股)製 );RC-5015、RC-5016、RC-5 020、RC-5 03 1、RC-5100、 RC-5102、RC-5120、RC-5122、RC-5152、RC-5171、RC-5180、RC-5181 (大日本油墨化學工業(股)製); OlexNo.340 Clear (中國塗料(股)製);SanradH-601、 RC-750、RC-700、RC-600、RC-500、RCSanrad-61 1 ' RC-612(三洋化成工業(株)製);SP-1509、SP-1507 (昭 和高分子(股)製);RCC-15C( Grace. Japan (股)製) 、Aronix M-6 100 ' M-803 0、M-8 060 (東亞合成(股)製 )、NKhardB-420、NKesterA-DOG、NKesteA-IBD-2E (新 中村化學工業(股)製)等。 其他例如有三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、二-三羥甲基 丙烷四丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯 酸酯、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯、二噁烷二醇丙烯酸酯、環 氧化丙烯酸酯、烷基改性二季戊四醇五丙烯酸酯等。 本發明之交聯劑與具有反應部位之樹脂的混合組成物 ’例如有聚乙烯醇與乙二醛、明膠與乙二醛等。 中間層可含有氟-丙烯酸共聚合物樹脂。氟-丙烯酸共 聚合物樹脂係指氟單體與丙烯酸單體所構成之共聚合物樹 脂’特佳爲氟單體片段與丙烯酸單體片段所構成之崁段共 聚合物。 -73- 201106060 (中間層之製造方法) 中間層係使用凹版印刷(gravure )塗佈器、浸漬塗佈 器、逆輥塗佈器、金屬線棒塗佈器、模塗佈器、噴墨法等 周知之方法,將形成中間層之塗佈組成物塗佈於二軸性薄 膜3 0上,然後加熱乾燥進行硬化處理較佳。 塗佈量係濕膜厚表示,〇.1〜40 μηι較適當,較佳爲 0.5〜30μπι 〇 乾膜厚係平均膜厚0.01〜ΙμΐΏ,較佳爲0.02~0.7μηι。 上述UV硬化處理的光源只要是可產生紫外線的光源 時,即無特別限定均可使用。可使用例如低壓水銀燈、中 壓水銀燈、高壓水銀燈、超高壓水銀燈、碳弧燈、金屬鹵 素燈、氙燈等。 照射條件係因各燈而異,活性線之照射量通常爲 5〜500mJ/cm2,較佳爲 5~150mJ/cm2。 又,在照射活性線時,在二軸性薄膜3 0之搬送方向賦 予張力同時進行照射較佳,更佳爲在寬方向也賦予張力同 時進行照射。賦予之張力較佳爲3 0〜3 ΟΟΝ/m。 賦予張力的方法無特別限定,在背滾筒上可於搬送方 向賦予張力,或以拉幅器於寬方向或2軸方向賦予張力。 藉此可得到平面性優異的薄膜。 形成中間層之塗佈組成物中可含有溶劑。塗佈組成物 中所含有的有機溶劑,可適當選擇例如烴類(例如甲苯、 二甲苯)、醇類(例如甲醇、乙醇、異丙醇、丁醇、環己 醇)、酮類(例如丙酮、甲基乙基酮、甲基異丁基酮等) -74- 201106060 、酯類(例如乙酸甲酯、乙酸乙酯、乳酸甲酯等)、乙二 醇醚類、其他有機溶劑或此等可混合使用。 有機溶劑較佳爲丙二醇單烷醚(烷基之碳原子數爲 1〜4)或丙二醇單烷醚乙酸酯(烷基之碳原子數爲1〜4)等 。有機溶劑的含量係在塗佈組成物中,較佳爲含有5〜80質 量%。 <液晶層> 液晶層31係折射率滿足nz>nx = ny,即所謂的正型C板 。此液晶層3 1較佳爲具有下述特性者。 0 ^ Ro ^ 1 0 -5 00 ^ Rth ^-100 液晶層3 1係將液晶材料或液晶之溶液直接塗佈於二軸 性薄膜30上,或塗佈於前述中間層上,進行乾燥與熱處理 (也稱爲配向處理),以紫外線硬化或熱聚合等使液晶配 向固定化而形成的,具有配向於垂直方向之棒狀液晶所產 生的相位差。 配向於垂直方向係指棒狀液晶對於作爲支持體之二軸 性薄膜30的薄膜面,在70〜90° (垂直方向爲90°)的範圍 內。 棒狀液晶即使對於二軸性薄膜3 0爲斜配向,但是配向 角可慢慢改變進行配向。較佳爲80~90°的範圍。 此液晶層3 1係配向於11〇爲0〜1011111、11111爲-5()0~-10011111 之範圍之垂直方向的棒狀液晶所形成的相位差層。Ro更佳 -75- 201106060 爲0〜5nm的範圍。 使棒狀液晶配向形成液晶層3 1時,可採用 晶材料爲垂直方向排列之垂直配向劑的上述中 膜)’使液晶材料垂直配向後予以固定的方法 液晶材料本身在空氣界面呈垂直方向配向 控制力到達與空氣界面相反的界面及配向膜不 構成可簡單化的觀點,此方法較佳。 使液晶材料垂直配向的具體方法可使用 2005- 1 48473號公報等所記載,使用由含有( 酸系嵌段聚合物之嵌段聚合物組成物的交聯物 向膜等的方法、如特開2005-265889號公報所 垂直配向膜的方法、使用應用空氣界面垂直配 等習知的方法。 爲了液晶層3 1在上述Ro、Rth之特性範圍 進行棒狀液晶層的配向、膜厚控制、紫外線硬 、傾角(tilt )控制及於支持體(二軸性薄膜 界面的預傾角的控制。 液晶層3 1係以所定的溫度可成爲液晶相之 有所定的液晶規則性,藉由硬化所形成者。顯 溫度的上限係例如只要是基材之纖維素酯薄膜 的溫度即可,無特別的限制。 具體而言,從製程溫度之控制的容易性與 持的觀點,較佳爲120°C以下,更佳爲1〇〇。(:以 爲液晶相的液晶材料較適合使用。此外,顯示 使用塗佈液 間層(配向 〇 時,其配向 —定需要, 如日本特開 甲基)丙烯 所構成的配 記載,使用 向劑的方法 時,較佳爲 化時的溫度 30 )與空氣 液晶材料具 示液晶相的 不受到損傷 尺寸精度維 下的溫度成 出液晶相之 -76- 201106060 溫度下限係作爲偏光板使用時,液晶材料可保持配 的溫度。 液晶層3 1所使用的液晶材料較佳爲使用聚合性 料。聚合性液晶材料可藉由照射所定的活性放射線 合後使用’在聚合的狀態時,垂直的配向狀態被固5 聚合性液晶材料可使用聚合性液晶單體、聚合 寡聚物或聚合性液晶聚合物中任一種,可互相混合 〇 聚合性液晶材料在上述中’因配向時的感度高 配向容易’因此聚合性液晶單體較適用。 具體的聚合性液晶單體例如有下述一般式(1 的棒狀液晶性化合物(I )、及下述一般式(2 )表 狀液晶性化合物(II)。化合物(〇可混合一般贫 所包含之化合物之2種以上來使用,同樣的,化合物 也可混合一般式(2 )所包含之化合物的2種以上來 此外’也可混合一種以上的化合物(I)與1種以上 物(II)來使用。 [化 19] 向狀態 液晶材 進行聚 g化。 性液晶 後使用 ,垂直 )表示 示的棒 :(1 ) (II) 使用。 的化合Wherein Y represents a hydrogen atom 'halogen atom or an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group and a phenyl group, and these alkyl groups, alkenyl groups and phenyl groups may have a substituent. A represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a phenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group or a -CO(NH) „-1-d group, and D represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or A phenyl group which may have a substituent. The hydrazine and the n-form represent 1 or 2. The above-mentioned 'hospital group has, for example, a straight or branched aliphatic group which represents a carbon number of 24', and the alkoxy group has, for example, a carbon number of 18 The alkoxy group, the alkene-58-201106060 group, for example, has an alkenyl group, an allyl group, a 2-butenyl group and the like having a carbon number of 16. Further, a substituent of an 'alkyl'alkenyl group or a phenyl group, wherein a halogen Examples of the atom include a chlorine atom, a desert atom, a fluorine atom, a hydroxyl group, a phenyl group (this phenyl group may be substituted by an alkyl group or a halogen atom, etc.), etc. The benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorption represented by the general formula (e) is shown below. Specific examples of the agent, but the present invention is not limited thereto. υν·10: 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone ϋν·1 1 : 2,2'-dihydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone UV-12: 2-hydroxy-4-methoxy-5-sulfobenzophenone UV-13··bis(2-methoxy-4-hydroxy-5-phenylphenylphenylmethane) In addition, Disc-shaped compound of a compound having a 1,3,5-triazine ring or the like The first and second optical compensation films 3 and 5 of the present invention may preferably contain two or more kinds of ultraviolet absorbers. Further, the ultraviolet absorber is preferably a polymer ultraviolet absorber. It is particularly preferable to use a polymer type ultraviolet absorber described in JP-A-6-148439. The method of adding a UV absorber is to dissolve an ultraviolet absorber in an alcohol or dichloromethane such as methanol, ethanol or butanol. An organic solvent such as methyl acetate, acetone, dioxol an e or the like, or added to the dope, or directly added to the dope composition. Insoluble as inorganic powder In organic solvents, it can be added to the cement after dispersing it in an organic solvent and a cellulose ester using a dissolver or a sander. The amount of the ultraviolet absorber used is based on the type of the ultraviolet absorber, and -59-201106060 The conditions are the same, and when the dry film thickness of the optical compensation film (optical compensation layer 3, 5) is 30 to 200 μm, it is preferably 〇5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.6 to 4% by mass with respect to the optical compensation film. (3.5 Oxidation preventive agent) The oxidation preventive agent is also called a deterioration preventive agent. When the liquid crystal image display device or the like is in a state of high humidity and high temperature, the first 'second optical compensation layer as an optical compensation film may be used. The oxidation preventing agent is preferably contained in the optical compensation film, for example, having a function of slowing down or preventing phosphoric acid of a halogen or a phosphate-based plasticizer due to the amount of residual solvent in the optical compensation film, and decomposing the optical compensation film. Such an antioxidant is preferably a hindered phenol-based compound such as 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol or pentaerythritol-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4). -hydroxyphenyl)propionate], triethylene glycol-bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], 1,6-hexanediol Bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-ylhydroxyphenyl)propionate], 2,4-bis(n-octylthio)-6-(4-hydroxy-3, 5-di-t-butylanilino)-1,3,5-triazine, 2,2-thio-diethylene bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4- Hydroxyphenyl)propionate], octadecyl-3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyl) Phenyl)propionate, hydrazine, Ν'-hexylene bis(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamylamine), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4 ,6-tris(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene, tris(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-isocyanurate, etc. . Particularly preferred is 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythritol-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], tri- 60-201106060 Glycol bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate]. Further, a metal inert agent such as N,N,-bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propanyl]anthracene or the like can be used. , a phosphorus-based processing stabilizer such as 4-di-tert-butylphenyl phosphite. The amount of such a compound to be added is preferably from 1 ppm to 1.0%, more preferably from 10 to 1,000 ppm, based on the mass ratio of Table 7K to the cellulose derivative. (3·6 particles) The first and second optical compensation films 3, 5 of the present invention preferably contain fine particles used in the present invention, wherein the inorganic compound is, for example, cerium oxide, titanium oxide, aluminum oxide, oxidized cone, carbonic acid. Calcium, talc, clay 'calcined clay, calcined calcium citrate, hydrated calcium citrate, aluminum citrate, magnesium citrate and calcium phosphate. The microparticle system is preferred because it has a low turbidity, and particularly preferably cerium oxide. The average particle diameter of the primary particles of the fine particles is preferably from 5 to 400 nm, more preferably from 10 to 300 nm. These may contain secondary agglomerates having a primary particle diameter of 0·05 to 0.3 μm, and particles having an average particle diameter of 100 to 400 nm may not aggregate or may be contained as primary particles. The content of such fine particles in the optical compensation films 3, 5 is preferably from 0.01 to 1% by mass, particularly preferably from 5% to 0.5% by mass. When the optical compensation films 3 and 5 composed of a plurality of layers of the co-casting method are used, it is preferable to contain the fine particles on the surface. As the fine particles of cerium oxide, for example, those sold under the trade names of AEROSIL R972, -61 - 201106060 R972V, R974, R812, 200, 200V, 300, R202, 0X50, TT600 (manufactured by Japan AEROSIL Co., Ltd.) can be used. As the fine particles of the oxidized pin, for example, those sold under the trade names of A E R Ο S IL R 9 7 6 and R 8 1 1 (manufactured by Japan AEROSIL Co., Ltd.) can be used. The polymer is, for example, a polyoxyalkylene resin, a fluororesin, and an acrylic resin. Preferably, it is a polydecane resin, particularly preferably a three-dimensional network structure, and for example, Tospear 103, Tospear 105, Tospear 108, Tospear 120, Tospear 145, Tospear 3120, and Tospear 2 4 0 (above) The trade name of the manufacturer of polyoxyalkylene (manufactured by the company). Among them, AEROSIL 200V and AEROSIL R972V are particularly suitable for maintaining the turbidity of the low optical compensation film and having a large effect of lowering the friction coefficient. The dynamic friction coefficient of at least one of the faces of the optical compensation films 3, 5 used in the present invention is preferably from 0.2 to 1.0. Various additives may be added in portions to the dope containing the solution of the cellulose ester before film formation, or an additional additive solution may be prepared for in-line addition. In particular, in order to reduce the load of the fine particles on the filter material, it is preferable to carry out the online addition in a part or the whole amount. When the additive solution is added in-line, in order to improve the miscibility with the dope, it is preferred to dissolve a small amount of the cellulose ester. The amount of the cellulose ester is preferably from 1 to 10 parts by mass, preferably from 3 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the solvent. In the present invention, for on-line addition and mixing, it is preferred to use, for example, static type mixing and stirring. An in-line mixer such as a device (made by Tor ay Engineering Co., Ltd.) or a SWJ (To ray stationary in-pipe mixer Hi-Mixer). -62-201106060 (3.7) Method for producing optical compensation film Next, a method of manufacturing the optical compensation film of the first and second optical compensation layers 3 and 5 of the present invention will be described. As the optical compensation film, a film produced by a solution casting method or a film produced by a melt casting method can be used. The optical compensation film of the present invention is produced by the following steps: a step of dissolving a cellulose ester and an additive in a solvent to prepare a dope. The slurry is cast onto an infinitely moving circulating metal support. The step of drying the cast paste in a web, the step of peeling from the metal support, the step of stretching or width maintaining, the step of further drying, and the step of winding up the finished film. The step of preparing the glue is explained. Although the concentration of the cellulose ester in the cement is lower, the drying load after casting on the metal support can be reduced, so it is preferable 'but if the concentration of the cellulose ester is too rich, the load during filtration increases, and the filtration The accuracy is worse. The concentration is preferably from 10 to 35 % by mass, more preferably from 15 to 25% by mass. The solvent used for the dope may be used singly or in combination of two or more. From the viewpoint of production efficiency, a good solvent and a poor solvent in which a cellulose ester is used in combination are preferred, and a good solvent is obtained from the viewpoint of solubility of the cellulose ester. More people are better. A preferred range of the mixing ratio of the good solvent to the poor solvent is 70 to 98% by mass of the good solvent and 2 to 30% by mass of the poor solvent. » The so-called good solvent and poor solvent are those which can dissolve the cellulose ester used alone. Defined as a good solvent, a person who produces swelling or insolubility alone is defined as a poor solvent. Therefore, when the average degree of acetylation (the degree of substitution of ethyl ketone) of cellulose ester of -63-201106060, the good solvent and the poor solvent may change, for example, when acetone is used as a solvent, the acetate in the cellulose ester ( The ethyl ketone group substitution degree is 2.4), the cellulose acetate propionic acid vinegar is a good solvent, and the cellulose acetate (the acetyl group substitution degree is 2.8) becomes a poor solvent. The good solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited. For example, there are organic halogen compounds such as dichlorocarbyl or dioxolane, acetone, methyl acetate, methyl acetate, and the like. Particularly preferred is dichloromethane or methyl acetate. Further, the poor solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, methanol 'ethanol, n-butanol, cyclohexan, cyclohexanone or the like is used. Further, it is preferred to contain 0.01 to 2% by mass of water in the gel. Further, the solvent used for the dissolution of the cellulose ester is recovered in the film forming step, and the solvent removed from the film is dried and reused. The recovered solvent may contain a trace amount of an additive added to the cellulose ester, such as a plasticizer, a UV absorber, a polymer, a monomer component, etc., but may be reused if necessary, and may be purified and then used if necessary. . A method of dissolving the cellulose ester in the preparation of the above-mentioned dope can be carried out by a general method. When combined heating and pressurization, it can be heated to above the boiling point of normal pressure. When the solvent is heated at a temperature above the normal pressure of the solvent at a temperature above the normal pressure and the solvent does not boil under pressure, the gel or the block undissolved material called mamaco can be prevented from occurring. good. Further, it is preferred to use a method in which a cellulose ester is mixed with a poor solvent to wet, moist or swell, and then a good solvent is added and dissolved. The pressurization can be carried out by a method of injecting an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or a method of increasing the vapor pressure of the solvent by n @力口 @ -64- 201106060. It is preferable to use a heating system. For example, since the jacket type is easy to control the temperature, the heating temperature of the solvent is preferably higher from the cellulose ester, but when the heating temperature is too high, the pressure is required to be produced. Sexual deterioration. The heating temperature is preferably 45 to 120 ° C, more preferably 70 ° C to 10 ° 5 t. Further, the pressure can be adjusted to a state in which the solvent does not boil. Alternatively, a cooling dissolution method may be used, whereby a solvent such as cellulose methyl ester may be used. Next, the fiber is filtered using a suitable filter material such as filter paper. In order to remove insoluble matter or the like, the filter material is preferably used in an absolute excess, but the absolute filtration accuracy is too small, and there is a problem that the filter material is easy. Therefore, it is preferable that the absolute filtration precision is 〇〇. 8 mm, more preferably 0.001 to 〇. 〇〇 8 mm of the filter material, more preferably 0.003 to 0 filter medium. The material of the filter material is not particularly limited, and a general filter medium such as a plastic filter material such as propylene or Teflon (registered trademark) or a metal filter material can be used because it has no fibers falling off. It is particularly excellent by reducing the impurities contained in the cellulose ester of the raw material. The term "bright spot foreign matter" means that two polarizing plates are arranged in a cross-counter, and an optical film or the like is placed therebetween, and when viewed from the other polarizing plate side, the visible point from the opposite side is observed. (Foreign object) 'The bright spot with a diameter of 〇·〇1 mm or more is externally entered. The point of view, the force becomes larger, the temperature is 6 0 ~ 1 1 0 〇C, and the filtration efficiency of the solution of the acetate ester solution is higher than that of the filter material under the blockage of 006mm, but the filter is removed by poly-stainless steel, and the foreign matter is compared with the side of the ear. The light is leaked by light, and the number is preferably -65 to 201106060 200 pieces/cm2 or less. More preferably, it is 100 pieces/cm2 or less, more preferably 50 pieces/m2 or less, and particularly preferably 0 to 10 pieces/cm2 or less. In addition, the bright spots of 0.01 mm or less are also preferred. The filtration of the dope can be carried out by a usual method, but at a temperature above the boiling point of the solvent, and heating at a temperature in which the solvent does not boil under pressure, while the filtration method, the hydraulic difference before and after the filtration The rise (called differential pressure) is less preferred. The preferred temperature is 4 5 to 1 2 0. (:, more preferably 45 to 70 ° C, more preferably 45 to 55 ° C. The filtration system is preferably small. The filtration pressure is preferably 1.6 MPa or less, more preferably 1.2 MPa or less, more preferably l. Below OMPa, the casting of the dope is described here. The metal support in the casting step is preferably a roller whose surface is mirror-processed by a mirror-finisher's metal support using a stainless steel strip or a cast surface. The width of the casting can be 1~4m. The surface temperature of the metal support in the casting step is -50 °C ~ the temperature of the boiling point of the solvent is not reached, and the drying speed of the fiber web can be made faster when the temperature is higher. Preferably, if the temperature is too high, the fiber web will foam or the flatness will be deteriorated. The preferred support temperature is 〇~40°C, more preferably 5~30°C, or by cooling. Gelating the web 'In a state containing a large amount of residual solvent, the method of peeling off from the drum is also an ideal method. The method of controlling the temperature of the metal support is not particularly limited, and there is a method of blowing hot air or cold air, or A method in which warm water contacts the inside of the metal support. The use of hot water is effective for heat Therefore, it is preferable to shorten the time until the temperature of the metal support reaches a certain level. When hot air is used, a wind having a temperature higher than the target temperature may be used. -66 - 201106060 In order to make the optical compensation film display a good plane The amount of the residual solvent when the fiber web is peeled off from the metal support is preferably from 1 to 150% by mass, more preferably from 20 to 40% by mass or from 60 to 130% by mass, particularly preferably from 20 to 30% by mass or 70 to 120% by mass. In the present invention, the amount of the residual solvent is defined by the following formula: The amount of residual solvent (% by mass) = {(Μ-Ν) / Ν} χ 100 In addition, the lanthanum fiber web or film is manufactured. Or the quality of the sample taken at any time after the manufacture, and the quality of the lanthanum after heating at 1 1 5 ° C for 1 hour. Further, in the drying step of the optical compensation film, the fiber web is peeled off from the metal support, Further, the amount of the residual solvent is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0% to 0.01% by mass or less. The film drying step is generally carried out by means of drum drying (the web is interactively By configuring it up and down A method in which a plurality of rollers are dried or conveyed by a tenter method while drying. In this case, when an optical compensation film as the first optical compensation layer 3 is produced, a shrinkable film is bonded to the dried fiber. In the case of producing an optical compensation film as the second optical compensation layer 5, it is preferable to perform biaxial stretching treatment. When the optical compensation film of the present invention is produced, it is held by a jig or the like. The tenter method at both ends of the fiber web is particularly preferably extended in the width direction (lateral direction). The peeling tension is preferably 3 Å/m or less. The means for drying the fiber web is not particularly limited. Generally, it can be dried using heat-67-201106060 air, infrared rays, heating rolls, microwaves, etc., but it is preferable to dry with hot air from a simple viewpoint. The drying temperature in the drying step of the fiber web is 40 to 200 t, and it is preferably stepwise. The film thickness of the optical compensation film is not particularly limited, and 10 to 200 μηΐ can be used. In particular, the film thickness is preferably 1 〇 to 1 〇〇 μπι. More preferably, it is 20 to 60 μηι 〇 The optical compensation film of the present invention can be used with a width of l to 4 m. In particular, it is preferable to use a width of 1.4 to 4 m, and particularly preferably 1.6 to 3 m. When it exceeds 4 m, handling becomes difficult. According to the liquid crystal display device 1 described above, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal cell 4 are aligned in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell 4 in the case of black display, and the first and second optical compensation layers 3 and 5 satisfy nxl >nzl> Nyl, nx22ny2> nz2, DSP(Rol) <1 <DSP (Rth2), so that the angle of view is enlarged, the front contrast is improved, and the color shift when viewed in the oblique direction can be prevented (refer to the embodiment). The liquid crystal display device of the present invention will be described with reference to the liquid crystal display device 1 shown in Fig. 1(a), but may be the liquid crystal display device 1A shown in Fig. 1(b). In the liquid crystal display device 1A of FIG. 1(b), the first polarizer 2, the first optical compensation layer 3, the liquid crystal cell 4, and the second optical compensation layer 5' are sequentially laminated from the identification side toward the backlight side. 2 polarizer 6, and the absorption axis 2 of the first polarizer 2 is parallel to the late phase axis 3 of the first optical compensation layer 3, and the absorption axis 2 of the first polarizer 2 is absorbed by the second polarizer 6. The axis 6 is orthogonal, and the slow axis 3J of the first optical compensation layer 3 and the absorption axis 6J of the second polarizer 6 are arranged in a state in which -68 - 201106060 are orthogonal to each other. However, in this Figure 1 (b), the backlight is on the lower side of the figure, but it can also be the upper side. [Second embodiment] Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Fig. 2 (a) is a view showing a schematic configuration of another liquid crystal display device 1D of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 1 D has the first polarizer 2, the first optical compensation layer 3D, the liquid crystal cell 4, and the second optical compensation layer in a state of being laminated in the following order from the identification side to the backlight side. 5. The second polarizer 6. The first optical compensation layer 3D has a biaxial film (base film) 30 and a liquid crystal layer 31 in this order from the identification side toward the backlight side. More specifically, the absorption axis 2J of the first polarizer 2, the second polarizer 6, and the biaxial film 3 第 first polarizer 2 is orthogonal to the slow axis 30J of the biaxial film 30, and the first The absorption axis 2J of the polarizer 2 is orthogonal to the absorption axis 6J of the second polarizer 6, and the slow axis 30 of the biaxial film 30 is parallel to the absorption axis 6 J of the second polarizer 6. . In Fig. 2, the backlight is on the lower side in the figure, but it may be the upper side. (First optical compensation layer) The first optical compensation layer 3D of the present embodiment has a biaxial film 30 and a liquid crystal layer 30, and is laminated, and the whole satisfies η X 1 > η z 1 > Ny 1, -69- 201106060 DSP (Rol) <1, in other words, a so-called reverse wavelength dispersed Z-plate. The first optical compensation layer 3D preferably has an in-plane retardation 値Rol of 50 to 100 nm, and a thickness 之Rth1 has an absolute 値 of 0 nm to 20 nm. The form of the first optical compensation layer 3 D is not particularly limited. It is preferably a film. The thickness d of the film is preferably from 40 to 100 μm, more preferably from 40 to 70 μm. <Biaxial film> The biaxial film 30 is a film having a refractive index satisfying nx > ny > nZ. In the above-described biaxial film 30, a cellulose resin film similar to that of the first optical compensation layer 3 of the above-described first embodiment can be used. <Intermediate Layer> The optical compensation layer 3D of the present invention may be provided with an intermediate layer (alignment film, which is not shown) which supports the vertical alignment of the liquid crystal between the biaxial film 30 and the liquid crystal layer 31. The intermediate layer of the present invention is composed of a transparent resin. The transparent resin is preferably a binder polymer having a saturated hydrocarbon chain or a polyether chain as a main chain, and more preferably a binder polymer having a saturated hydrocarbon chain as a main chain. Particularly preferred is a resin which is cured by a crosslinking reaction such as ultraviolet rays or electron beams, or a mixture of a crosslinking agent and a resin having a reaction site. The curable resin is preferably, for example, an ultraviolet curable urethane acrylate resin, an ultraviolet curable polyester acrylate resin-70-201106060, an ultraviolet curable epoxy acrylate resin, or an ultraviolet hard alcohol acrylic acid. A acrylate-based resin such as an ester resin or an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin. The ultraviolet curable acrylate-based resin is generally obtained by reacting a polyester isocyanate monomer or a prepolymer with 2' acrylate '2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (hereinafter, C contains methacrylate, and An acrylate-based monomer having a hydroxyl group such as acrylate or 2 acrylate is easily produced. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-151 1 1 1 0 can be used, for example, as a violet UV-7510B (Japanese Synthetic Chemicals Co., Ltd. UniDick 1 7-806 (made by Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd.) CORONET L (Japan) Polyurethane type polyester acrylate resin, general example ester polyol can be easily formed when reacting with 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate or 2-hydroxy acrylate. A specific example of the ultraviolet curable epoxy acrylate-based resin is an epoxy acrylate as an oligomer, and a reaction is added to the oligomer, and a photopolymer initiator is reacted. For the generator, those described in 曰1 - 1 05 7 3 8 can be used. The ultraviolet curable polyol acrylate resin is specifically trimethylolpropane triacrylate or di-trimethylolpropane-type polyfluoroethylene. The polyol is reacted with a hydroxypropyl group in the hydroxyethyl enoate, preferably.), 100 parts of the mixture, if the polyester is a single 1 5 1 1 1 2, such as a sexual diluent. This special case, such as four C Acid -71--201106060 ester 'pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate tetrol, alkyl-modified dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate. The photopolymerization initiator of such a curable resin is specifically, for example, benzoin and a derivative thereof, acetophenone, benzophenone, hydroxybenzophenone, rice ketone, and α-amiiro Ester (α-Amyloxim ester), thioxanthone, etc. and derivatives thereof. Can be used together with a light sensitizer. When an epoxy acrylate-based photopolymerization initiator is used, a sensitizer such as n-butylamine, triethylamine or tri-n-butylphosphine can be used. The photopolymerization initiator or the photosensitizer used in the curable resin composition is 0.1 to 25 parts by mass, preferably 1 to 5 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the composition. Acrylate resin For example, there are methacrylate, ethyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, ethylene glycol diacrylate 'propylene glycol diacrylate, divinyl benzene, 1,4-cyclohexane Diacrylate, 1, 4-cyclohexyldimethyl diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, and the like. Such commercially available products can be suitably selected, for example, Adeca optomer KR • BY system IJ: KR-400, KR-410, KR-5 50, KR-5 66, KR-5 67, 8丫-3208 (Asahi Electrochemical (stock) system; 1 <: 〇 611 ^ 4 8-101-1 <: 1 <:, eight-101-WS, C-3 02, C-401-N, C-501, M-101, M-102, T-102, D-102, NS-101, FT-102Q8, MAG-1-P20, AG-106, M-101-C (Guangrong Chemical Co., Ltd.); SEIKABEAM PHC22 1 0 ( S ) 'PHCX-9 ( K-3 ) ' PHC22 1 3 ' DP-1 0 ' DP- 20 , DP-30 ' P 1 000 , P 1 1 00 , P 1 200 , P 1 3 00 , P 1400 , -72- 201106060 P1500, P1600, SCR9 00 (Daily Seiki Co., Ltd.); KRM703 3, KRM703 9 , KRM7130, KRM713 1 , UVECRYL2920 1, UVECRYL 2 9 2 0 2 (D aice 1 · UCB (shares) RC-5015, RC-5016, RC-5 020, RC-5 03 1, RC-5100, RC-5102, RC-5120, RC-5122, RC-5152, RC-5171, RC-5180, RC-5181 (Daily Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.); OlexNo.340 Clear (China Coatings Co., Ltd.); SanradH-601, RC-750, RC-700, RC-600, RC-500, RCSanrad- 61 1 ' R C-612 (made by Sanyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.); SP-1509, SP-1507 (made by Showa Polymer Co., Ltd.); RCC-15C (made by Grace. Japan Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-6 100 ' M -803 0, M-8 060 (East Asia Synthetic Co., Ltd.), NKhard B-420, NKester A-DOG, NKeste A-IBD-2E (Naka Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Other examples are trimethylolpropane triacrylate, di-trimethylolpropane tetraacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dioxanediol acrylate, epoxidized acrylate , alkyl modified dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, and the like. The mixed composition of the crosslinking agent of the present invention and the resin having a reaction site is, for example, polyvinyl alcohol and glyoxal, gelatin, glyoxal or the like. The intermediate layer may contain a fluorine-acrylic acid copolymer resin. The fluorine-acrylic copolymer resin refers to a copolymer of a fluoromonomer and an acrylic monomer, which is particularly preferably a fluorene monomer segment and an acrylic monomer segment. -73- 201106060 (Manufacturing method of intermediate layer) The intermediate layer is a gravure coater, a dip coater, a reverse roll coater, a wire bar coater, a die coater, an ink jet method. The coating composition forming the intermediate layer is applied onto the biaxial film 30, and then dried by heating and hardening is preferably carried out by a known method. The coating amount is a wet film thickness, and is preferably 1 to 40 μm, preferably 0.5 to 30 μm, and the dry film thickness is 0.01 to ΙμΐΏ, preferably 0.02 to 0.7 μm. The light source for the UV curing treatment may be used without any particular limitation as long as it is a light source capable of generating ultraviolet rays. For example, a low pressure mercury lamp, a medium pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, an ultra high pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, or the like can be used. The irradiation conditions vary depending on the lamps, and the irradiation amount of the active rays is usually 5 to 500 mJ/cm2, preferably 5 to 150 mJ/cm2. Further, when the active wire is irradiated, the tension is preferably applied while the tension is applied in the transport direction of the biaxial film 30, and it is more preferable to apply the tension in the width direction as well. The tension imparted is preferably from 3 0 to 3 ΟΟΝ/m. The method of imparting the tension is not particularly limited, and the tension can be imparted to the conveyance direction on the back roll, or the tension can be imparted in the width direction or the two-axis direction by the tenter. Thereby, a film excellent in planarity can be obtained. The coating composition forming the intermediate layer may contain a solvent. The organic solvent contained in the coating composition can be appropriately selected, for example, from hydrocarbons (for example, toluene, xylene), alcohols (for example, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, cyclohexanol), and ketones (for example, acetone). , methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, etc.) -74- 201106060, esters (such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, etc.), glycol ethers, other organic solvents or these Can be mixed. The organic solvent is preferably propylene glycol monoalkyl ether (alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms) or propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate (alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms). The content of the organic solvent is preferably from 5 to 80% by mass in the coating composition. <Liquid crystal layer> The liquid crystal layer 31 has a refractive index satisfying nz > nx = ny, that is, a so-called positive C plate. The liquid crystal layer 31 preferably has the following characteristics. 0 ^ Ro ^ 1 0 - 5 00 ^ Rth ^-100 The liquid crystal layer 3 1 directly applies a solution of a liquid crystal material or a liquid crystal to the biaxial film 30, or is applied to the intermediate layer, and is dried and heat-treated. (also referred to as alignment treatment), which is formed by fixing liquid crystal alignment by ultraviolet curing or thermal polymerization, and has a phase difference caused by a rod-like liquid crystal aligned in the vertical direction. The orientation in the vertical direction means that the rod-like liquid crystal is in the range of 70 to 90 (the vertical direction is 90) with respect to the film surface of the biaxial film 30 as a support. Even if the rod-like liquid crystal is obliquely aligned with respect to the biaxial film 30, the alignment angle can be gradually changed to perform alignment. It is preferably in the range of 80 to 90°. The liquid crystal layer 31 is aligned with a retardation layer formed of a rod-like liquid crystal having a vertical direction in the range of 0 to 10111111 and 11111 of -5 () 0 to -10011111. Ro is better -75- 201106060 is a range of 0~5nm. When the rod-like liquid crystal is aligned to form the liquid crystal layer 31, the above-mentioned medium film of the vertical alignment agent in which the crystal material is arranged in the vertical direction can be used. The liquid crystal material is vertically aligned and fixed. The liquid crystal material itself is vertically aligned at the air interface. The method in which the control force reaches the interface opposite to the air interface and the alignment film does not constitute a simplification is preferable. For the specific method of aligning the liquid crystal material in a vertical direction, a method of using a crosslinked product of a block polymer composition of an acid block polymer to a film or the like, such as a special opening, can be used. In the method of the vertical alignment film, and the conventional method of applying the air interface vertical alignment, the alignment of the rod-like liquid crystal layer, the film thickness control, and the ultraviolet ray are performed in the characteristic range of the above-mentioned Ro and Rth. Hard, tilt control and control of the pre-tilt angle of the support (the biaxial film interface. The liquid crystal layer 31 can be a liquid crystal regularity at a predetermined temperature, and is formed by hardening. The upper limit of the temperature is not particularly limited as long as it is the temperature of the cellulose ester film of the substrate. Specifically, from the viewpoint of easiness of control of the process temperature and holding, it is preferably 120 ° C or less. More preferably, it is 1 〇〇. (: It is considered that the liquid crystal material of the liquid crystal phase is more suitable for use. In addition, it is shown that the interlayer of the coating liquid is used (when the alignment is performed, the alignment is required, such as a special methyl group in Japan) The composition of the olefin is described in the case where the method of using the agent is used, preferably at a temperature of 30), and the liquid crystal material exhibits a liquid crystal phase at a temperature which is not damaged by the dimensional accuracy of the liquid crystal. -76-201106060 When the lower temperature limit is used as a polarizing plate, the liquid crystal material can maintain the temperature. The liquid crystal material used for the liquid crystal layer 31 is preferably a polymerizable material. The polymerizable liquid crystal material can be used by irradiation of the predetermined active radiation. In the state of polymerization, the vertical alignment state is solidified. The polymerizable liquid crystal material may be any one of a polymerizable liquid crystal monomer, a polymerized oligomer, or a polymerizable liquid crystal polymer, and may be mutually mixed with a polymerizable liquid crystal material in the above. The polymerizable liquid crystal monomer is preferably used because it has a high degree of sensitivity in the alignment. The specific polymerizable liquid crystal monomer has, for example, the rod-like liquid crystal compound (I) of the following general formula (1), and the following general formula ( 2) The cleavage liquid crystalline compound (II). The compound (the oxime may be used in combination of two or more kinds of compounds included in the general poor, and the compound may be mixed as well. In addition, two or more kinds of the compounds of the general formula (2) may be used in combination with one or more compounds (I) and one or more kinds of the compounds (II). After the liquid crystal is used, vertical) indicates the stick: (1) (II) use.

XX

O-CCH, R2 -77- (2) 201106060 [化 20] ^-CQ— CH2C-Cj〇- CH2 表示化合物(I)之一般式(1)中,R1及R2係分別表 示氫或甲基,但從顯示液晶相之溫度範圍的廣度,Ri & R2 皆爲氫較佳。 X可爲氫、氯、溴、碘、碳數1~4的烷基 '甲氧基、氰 基、或硝基中任一者,但以氯或甲基較佳。 此外,表示化合物(I)之分子鏈兩端的(甲基)M 烯醯氧基與芳香環之間隔物之伸烷基的鏈長之a及b名 Μ & 2〜1 2的範圍內,可爲任意的整數,但以4〜10的範圍較佳, 更佳爲6〜9的範圍。 除上述外,本發明中,聚合性液晶寡聚物或聚合性液 晶聚合物,可適當選擇使用以往技術所提案之習知的材料 例如聚合性棒狀液晶性化合物可使用例如Makromol.O-CCH, R2 -77- (2) 201106060 [Chem. 20] ^-CQ-CH2C-Cj〇-CH2 represents the general formula (1) of the compound (I), and R1 and R2 represent hydrogen or methyl, respectively. However, from the breadth of the temperature range in which the liquid crystal phase is displayed, Ri & R2 are preferably hydrogen. X may be any of hydrogen, chlorine, bromine, iodine, an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, a methoxy group, a cyano group, or a nitro group, but chlorine or a methyl group is preferred. Further, in the range of a and b names Μ & 2 to 1 2 of the chain length of the alkyl group of the (meth) M olefin oxy group at the both ends of the molecular chain of the compound (I) and the spacer of the aromatic ring, It may be any integer, but is preferably in the range of 4 to 10, more preferably in the range of 6 to 9. In the present invention, the polymerizable liquid crystal oligomer or the polymerizable liquid crystal polymer can be appropriately selected from the conventional materials proposed by the prior art. For example, a polymerizable rod-like liquid crystal compound can be used, for example, Makromol.

Chem.,190 卷、22 5 5 頁(1 9 8 9 年)、Advanced Materials 5卷、107頁(1993年)、美國專利第4683327號說明書、 同5622648號說明書、同5770 1 07號說明書、國際公開 W095/22586號公報、同95/24455號公報、同97/00600號公 報、同9 8/2 3 5 8 0號公報、同9 8/52905號公報、特開平1- 2 7 2551號公報、同6-16616號公報、同7-110469號公報、同 1 1 -8008 1號公報、特開200 1 -328973號公報、特開2004- 240 1 8 8號公報、特開2005-99236號公報 '特開2005-99237 -78- 201106060 號公報、特開2005-121827號公報、特開2002 — 30042號公報 等所記載的化合物。 本發明中’除了聚合性液晶材料,必要時可使用光聚 合引發劑。藉由電子線照射使聚合性液晶材料聚合時,有 時不需要光聚合引發劑’但是一般使用之例如藉由紫外線 (UV)照射硬化時’通常爲了促進聚合可使用光聚合引 發劑。 光聚合引發劑例如有苯偶醯(也稱爲聯苯醯)、苯偶 因異丁醚、苯偶因異丙酸、二苯甲酮、苯甲醯苯甲酸、苯 甲醯苯甲酸甲酯、4-苯甲醯-4’-甲基二苯基硫化物、苄基 甲基縮酮、二甲基胺基甲基苯甲酸酯、2_n_丁氧基乙基·4_ 一甲基1女基本甲酸醋、p - 一甲基胺基苯甲酸異戊醋、3,3,-二甲基-4 -甲氧基二苯甲酮、羥甲基苯甲醯甲酸酯、2_甲 基-1 - ( 4 -(甲基硫代)苯基)-2 -嗎啉基丙烷-]_酮、2 -苄 基-—甲基女基-嗎琳基苯基)-丁院-1_酮、ι_(4· 十二烷基苯基)-2·羥基-2-甲基丙烷-1-酮、ι_羥基環己基 苯基酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基丙烷-丨_酮、^(4-異丙基 苯基)-2 -羥基-2 -甲基丙烷-1-酮、2-氯噻噸酮、2,4 -二乙 基噻噸酮、2,4 -二異丙基噻噸酮、2,4 -二甲基噻噸酮、異 丙基噻噸酮、或1 -氯_4_丙氧基噻噸酮等。 光聚合引發劑的添加量一般較佳爲0.01 %〜20 %,更佳 爲0.1 %〜10%,更佳爲〇 5%〜5 %的範圍內,可添加於本發明 之聚合性液晶材料中。 光聚合引發劑以外,在不影響本發明之目的範圍內可 -79- 201106060 添加增感劑。 本發明中之液晶層31的膜厚較佳爲0·1μιη〜10μΓη的範 圍內,更佳爲0.2〜5μηι的範圍內。 聚合性液晶材料在必要時,調配光聚合引發劑、增感 劑等調製液晶層形成用組成物來使用,塗佈於基材(二軸 性薄膜3 0 )上’形成液晶層形成用層。 形成固定液晶配向之層的方法,可採用例如預先形成 乾薄膜等,將此固定液晶配向之層者層合於基材上的方法 、或使液晶組成物溶解或熔解後塗佈於基材上的方法等, 但是本發明中,使用添加溶劑,溶解其他成分的塗佈用組 成物作爲液晶組成物,塗佈於基材上,藉由去除溶劑,形 成固定液晶配向之層較佳。此法與其他的方法比較,在步 驟上較簡便。 溶劑只要是可溶解上述聚合性液晶材料等之溶劑,且 不會降低透明樹脂薄膜之性狀的溶劑即可,無特別的限制 ,具體而言可使用苯、甲苯、二甲苯、η_ 丁基苯、二乙基 苯、萘滿等之烴類;甲氧基苯、1,2-二甲氧基苯' 二乙二 醇二甲醚等的醚類;丙酮、甲基乙基酮、甲基異丁基酮、 環己酮、或2,4-戊二酮等之酮類;乙酸乙酯、乙二醇單甲 醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、 或γ-丁內酯等之酯類;2-吡咯烷酮、Ν-甲基·2-吡咯烷酮、 二甲基甲醯胺、或二甲基乙醯胺等之醯胺系溶劑;氯仿、 二氯甲烷、四氯化碳、二氯乙烷、四氯乙烷、三氯乙烯、 四氯乙烯、氯苯、或鄰二氯苯等之鹵系溶劑;t-丁醇、二 -80- 201106060 丙酮醇、甘油、甘油乙酸酯、乙二醇、三乙二醇' 己二醇 類、乙二醇單甲醚、乙基溶纖劑、或丁基溶纖劑等之醇類 :酚、對氯酚等之酚類等的1種或2種以上。 僅使用單一種的溶劑時,有時聚合性液晶材料等的溶 解性不足’或如上述,基材(二軸性薄膜30)被侵蝕的情 況。但是混合使用2種以上的溶劑,可避免此不理想的情 形。 上述的溶劑中,單獨溶劑之較佳者係烴系溶劑與乙二 醇單醚乙酸酯系溶劑,混合溶劑之較佳者係醚類或酮類與 乙二醇類的混合系。 溶液的濃度係依聚合性液晶材料等之溶解性或欲製造 之液晶層的膜厚而定’故無法一槪限定,但通常較佳爲在 1 %〜60%內’更佳爲在3%〜40%的範圍內進行調整。 本發明所使用的液晶層形成用組成物,在不影響本發 明之目的的範圍內’可添加上述以外的化合物。 可添加的化合物例如有使多元醇與1元酸或多元酸縮 合所得之聚酯預聚物’與(甲基)丙烯酸反應而得到的聚 醋(甲基)丙烯酸酯;使具有多元醇基與2個異氰酸酯基 之化合物互相反應後’使其反應生成物與(甲基)丙烯酸 所得到的聚胺基甲酸(甲基)丙烯酸酯;使雙酚A型環氧 樹脂、雙酣F型環氧樹脂、酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、聚羧酸 聚縮水甘油醋、多元醇聚縮水甘油醚、脂肪族或脂環族環 氧樹脂、胺環氧樹脂、三酚甲烷型環氧樹脂、二羥基苯型 環氧樹脂等的環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸進行反應所得之 -81 - 201106060 環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的光聚合性化合物、或具有丙稀 酸基或甲基丙烯酸基之光聚合性的液晶性化合物、特開 2007-45993號公報所記載之鑰鹽、氟化丙烯酸酯聚合物等 〇 相對於本發明相關的液晶層形成用組成物,此等化合 物的添加量係在不影響本發明之目的的範圍內來選擇,一 般而言,本發明之液晶層形成用組成物之40%以下較佳, 更佳爲20%以下。 藉由添加此等化合物,提昇本發明中之液晶材料的硬 化性,增加所得之液晶層的機械強度,且改善其安定性。 此外,摻合溶劑的液晶層形成用組成物中,爲了容易 塗佈,可添加界面活性劑等。 可添加之界面活性劑例如有舉咪唑啉、四級銨鹽、烷 基胺氧化物、聚胺衍生物等之陽離子系界面活性劑;聚氧 化乙烯-聚氧化丙烯縮合物、一級或二級醇羥乙基酯、烷 基酚羥乙基酯、聚乙二醇及其酯、月桂基硫酸鈉、月桂基 硫酸銨、月桂基硫酸胺類、烷基取代芳香族磺酸鹽、烷基 磷酸鹽、脂肪族或芳香族磺酸甲醛水縮合物等之陰離子系 界面活性劑;月桂基醯胺丙基甜菜鹼、月桂基胺基乙酸甜 菜鹼等之兩性系界面活性劑;聚乙二醇脂肪酸酯類、聚氧 化乙烯烷基胺等之非離子系界面活性劑;全氟烷基磺酸鹽 、全氟烷基羧酸鹽、全氟烷基環氧乙烷加成物、全氟烷基 三甲基銨鹽、含有全氟烷基·親水性基之寡聚物、含全氟 烷基·親油基之寡聚物、含有全氟烷基之胺基甲酸酯等之 -82- 201106060 氟系界面活性劑等。 界面活性劑的添加量係依界面活性劑的種類、液晶材 料的種類、溶劑的種類及塗佈溶液之配向膜的種類而定, 通吊溶液所含有之聚合性液晶材料的1〇1?1)111〜10%較佳,更 佳爲1 0 0 p p m〜5 % ’更佳爲0 · 1〜1 %的範圍。 塗佈液晶層形成用組成物之方法例如有旋轉塗佈法、 輥塗佈法、印刷法、浸漬上拉法 '模塗佈(die coat )法 、鑄造法、棒塗法、刮板塗佈法、噴塗法、凹版塗佈法、 逆向輥塗佈法'或擠出塗佈法等。 塗佈液晶層形成用組成物後,去除溶劑的方法,例如 風乾 '加熱去除、或減壓去除,也可藉由組合此等的方法 去除。去除溶劑形成固定液晶配向的層。 使聚合性液晶材料硬化的步驟係被賦予使聚合性液晶 材料硬化用的能量’可爲熱能,但通常藉由照射具有產生 聚合之能力的電離放射線來進行硬化。 必要時’聚合性液晶材料內中可含有聚合引發劑。電 離放射線只要是可使聚合性液晶材料聚合的放射線即可, 無特別限定,但通常由裝置之容易度等的觀點,使用紫外 光或可見光線,較佳爲波長爲150〜500nm的光,更佳爲 250~450nm ’更佳爲300〜400nm之波長的紫外線。 本發明中’以照射作爲活性放射線的紫外線(UV ) ’藉由紫外線使聚合引發劑產生自由基,進行自由基聚合 的方法較佳。使用作爲活性放射線之UV的方法係已確立 的技術’故包括使用的聚合引發劑,可容易應用於本發明 -83- 201106060 照射此紫外線用的光源,例如有低壓水銀燈(殺菌,燈 、螢光化學燈、黑燈)、高壓放電燈(高壓水銀燈、金屬 鹵素燈)或短電弧放電燈(超高壓水銀燈、氙燈、水銀$ 燈)等。 其中推薦使用金屬鹵素燈、氙燈、高壓水銀燈等。@ 射強度可依形成固定液晶配向之層用之聚合性液晶材# @ 組成或光聚合引發劑的多寡來適當調整即可。 藉由照射活性放射線之配向固定化步驟係以形成上% 液晶層形成用層之步驟中的處理溫度,即聚合性液晶材料 成爲液晶相的溫度條件來進行,此外也可使用低於成爲液 晶相的溫度之低溫度來進行》 依據以上的液晶顯示裝置1 D時,當然也可得到與上述 第1實施形態同樣的效果,而第1光學補償層3D爲具有二軸 性薄膜30與正型C板之液晶層3 1的層合構成,因此相較於 第1光學補償層以單層所構成的情形,爲了發揮視角擴大 效果時,可明顯減少必須賦予光學補償層之相位差的大小 。具體而言,第1光學補償層以單層構成時,爲了發揮視 角擴大效果時,對於該光學補償層必須賦予延遲値 Ro兰27 5之非常大的相位差,而第1光學補償層3D係對於光 學補償層3D之整體,只要賦予延遲値Ro = 50〜100之所謂的 2分之1以下的相位差時,即可發揮視角擴大效果。因此’ 與第1光學補償層以單層構成的情形不同,可防止光學補 償層因面內之稍微光軸偏差的影響而進行增幅,因此可降 -84- 201106060 低相位差不均’可維持高的正面對比(參照實施例)。 上述第2實施形態係將本發明之液晶顯示裝置以圖2 ( a )所示的液晶顯示裝置1 D來說明,但是可爲圖2 ( b )所 示的液晶顯示裝置1 E。其中,圖2 ( b )之液晶顯示裝置1 E 係由辨識側朝背光側,依序層合第1偏光子2、第1光學補 償層3D之液晶層31及二軸性薄膜30、液晶胞4、第2光學補 償層5、第2偏光子6,而第1偏光子2之吸收軸2J與二軸性 薄膜30之遲相軸30J平行,而第1偏光子2之吸收軸2J與第2 偏光子6之吸收軸6〗正交,而二軸性薄膜30之遲相軸30J與 第2偏光子6之吸收軸6〗成爲正交的狀態來配設。但是此圖 2 ( b )中,背光係在圖中之下側,但是也可爲上側。 此外,本發明不限定於上述第1、第2實施形態,可適 當變更或改良。 例如本發明之液晶顯示裝置不限於圖1、圖2的構成, 可含有其他構件,例如在液晶胞4與偏光子2、6之間可配 置彩色濾光片。可在偏光子2、6之保護膜表面施予防反射 處理或硬化層(hard coat )。此外,也可使用對於構成構 件賦予導電性者。作爲透過型使用時,可將以冷陰極或熱 陰極螢光管、或發光二極體、場效發射元件、電致發光元 件作爲光源的背光配置於背面。此時,背光的配置可在圖 1及圖2的上側,也可在下側。此外,液晶胞4與背光之間 可配置反射型偏光板或擴散板、稜鏡薄片或導光板。如上 述,本發明之液晶顯示裝置可爲反射型,此時,偏光板可 在辨識側僅配置1片,或在液晶胞4背面或液晶胞4之下側 -85- 201106060 玻璃基扳41的內面配置反射膜。當然’可將使用前述光源 之前光設置於液晶胞的辨識側。 【實施方式】 實施例 以下舉實施例、比較例具體說明本發明,但是本發明 不限於此等。 《光學補償薄膜Z1-Z9之製作》 製作下表1所示之光學補償薄膜Z1〜Z9,作爲上述實施 形態中之第1光學補償薄膜3之試料。 • 86 - 201106060 〔一嗽〕 液晶膜厚 (μιη) (N &lt;N oo o T—H 1 &lt;N cn 基材膜厚 (μηι) oo cn in VO ^T) 褂^ 〇 r—^ ο O CO rn 1-H 〇 T—H o 添加劑量 (質量份) 1 m m m m 1 m 添加劑種 1 添加劑2 添加劑2 添加劑2 添加劑2 1 添加劑2 添加劑量 (質量份) Ο Ο o o o 〇 o 添加劑種 1 添加劑1 添加劑1 添加劑1 添加劑1 添加劑1 添加劑1 添加劑1 樹脂 c PQ CQ CQ PQ U PQ 基材 CN &lt; cn^ 寸 &lt; ^T) &lt; 00 &lt; 〇\ &lt; 薄膜Z1 薄膜Z2 薄膜Z3 薄膜Z4 N 鹦 m 薄膜Z8 薄膜Z9 -87- 201106060 (纖維素酯混合物之調製) 纖維素酯A (纖維素乙酸酯丙酸酯)1 00質量份 添加劑1 1 1 0質量份 二聚甲烷 3 00質量份 乙醇 5 2質量份 將以上成分投入密閉容器中,加熱攪拌同時完全溶解 後,使用安積濾紙(股)製的安積濾紙No.24過濾,調製 纖維素酯混合物。此混合物使用日本精線(股)製之 finemet NF過濾、。 但是上述纖維素酯A係指如下表2所示,乙醯基取代度 1 · 6、丙醯基取代度0 · 9的纖維素酯。上述添加劑丨係如下表 3所示,下述化合物3表示的糖酯化合物。 〔表2〕 纖維素酯 乙醯基取代度 總醯基取代度 A 乙醯基1.6、丙醯基0.9 2.5 B 乙醯基1.9、丙醯基0.7 2.6 C 乙醯基2.4、聚ε-己內酯基0.3 2.7 D 乙醯2.9 2.9 〔表3〕 添加劑 添加劑1 糖酯化合物3 添加劑2 丙烯酸系化合物 DSP値上昇劑1 方香族末端聚酯系化合物18 ' DSP値上昇劑2 物(特開2007-2491趣逆卜般式(II)例示化合物334) -88- 201106060 化合物3Chem., vol. 190, 22 5 5 (19 9 9), Advanced Materials 5, 107 (1993), US Patent No. 4683327, the same as 5622648, the same as 5770 1 07, international Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. H09/22586, the same as Japanese Patent Publication No. 95/24455, the same as the Japanese Patent Publication No. 97/00600, the same as the Japanese Patent Publication No. 9/8/3,500, and the Japanese Patent Publication No. H08-52905 Japanese Patent Publication No. 6-16616, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-110469, Japanese Patent Publication No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei. No. Hei. The compounds described in the publications of JP-A No. 2005-103, and JP-A-2005-121827, and JP-A-2002-30042. In the present invention, in addition to the polymerizable liquid crystal material, a photopolymerization initiator can be used as necessary. When the polymerizable liquid crystal material is polymerized by electron beam irradiation, a photopolymerization initiator is sometimes not required. However, when it is generally used, for example, by ultraviolet (UV) irradiation, a photopolymerization initiator is usually used to promote polymerization. The photopolymerization initiator is, for example, benzoin (also known as biphenyl hydrazine), benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin isopropyl acid, benzophenone, benzamidine benzoic acid, methyl benzoyl benzoate. , 4-benzylidene-4'-methyldiphenyl sulfide, benzyl methyl ketal, dimethylaminomethyl benzoate, 2_n_butoxyethyl.4_monomethyl 1 Female basic formic acid vinegar, p-monomethylaminobenzoic acid isotonic vinegar, 3,3,-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzophenone, methylolbenzate, 2-sheet -1 -(4-(methylthio)phenyl)-2- morpholinylpropan-]-one, 2-benzyl-methyl-l-yl-phenylene phenyl)-Dingyuan-1 _ketone, ι_(4·dodecylphenyl)-2.hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, i-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-benzene Propane-oxime-ketone, ^(4-isopropylphenyl)-2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, 2,4-diisopropylthioxanthone, 2,4-dimethylthioxanthone, isopropylthioxanthone, or 1-chloro-4-propoxythioxanthone. The amount of the photopolymerization initiator to be added is generally preferably from 0.01% to 20%, more preferably from 0.1% to 10%, still more preferably from 5% to 5%, and may be added to the polymerizable liquid crystal material of the present invention. . In addition to the photopolymerization initiator, a sensitizer may be added to -79-201106060 within the range not impairing the object of the present invention. The film thickness of the liquid crystal layer 31 in the present invention is preferably in the range of from 0.1 μm to 10 μm, more preferably in the range of from 0.2 to 5 μm. The polymerizable liquid crystal material is used by preparing a composition for forming a liquid crystal layer such as a photopolymerization initiator or a sensitizer, and is applied to a substrate (a biaxial film 30) to form a layer for forming a liquid crystal layer. The method of forming a layer for fixing the liquid crystal alignment may be, for example, a method of previously forming a dry film or the like, laminating the layer for fixing the liquid crystal alignment layer on the substrate, or dissolving or melting the liquid crystal composition on the substrate. However, in the present invention, it is preferred to use a coating composition in which a solvent is added and a coating composition for dissolving other components as a liquid crystal composition, and to apply a layer to fix the liquid crystal alignment by applying a solvent to the substrate. This method is simpler in comparison with other methods. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent which can dissolve the solvent such as the polymerizable liquid crystal material and does not lower the properties of the transparent resin film, and specifically, benzene, toluene, xylene, and η-butylbenzene can be used. Hydrocarbons such as diethylbenzene and tetralin; ethers such as methoxybenzene and 1,2-dimethoxybenzene diethylene glycol dimethyl ether; acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl iso a ketone such as butyl ketone, cyclohexanone or 2,4-pentanedione; ethyl acetate, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, Or an ester of γ-butyrolactone or the like; a guanamine solvent such as 2-pyrrolidone, fluorenyl-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, dimethylformamide or dimethylacetamide; chloroform or dichloromethane a halogenated solvent such as carbon tetrachloride, dichloroethane, tetrachloroethane, trichloroethylene, tetrachloroethylene, chlorobenzene or o-dichlorobenzene; t-butanol, di-80-201106060 acetol Alcohols such as glycerin, glycerin acetate, ethylene glycol, triethylene glycol 'hexanediol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethyl cellosolve, or butyl cellosolve: phenol, Phenols such as chlorophenol, etc. or two or more. When only a single solvent is used, the solubility of the polymerizable liquid crystal material or the like may be insufficient or the substrate (the biaxial film 30) may be eroded as described above. However, mixing two or more solvents can avoid this undesirable situation. Among the above solvents, a solvent alone is preferably a hydrocarbon solvent and an ethylene glycol monoether acetate solvent, and a mixed solvent is preferably an ether or a mixture of a ketone and an ethylene glycol. The concentration of the solution depends on the solubility of the polymerizable liquid crystal material or the thickness of the liquid crystal layer to be produced, and thus cannot be limited, but it is usually preferably from 1% to 60%, more preferably at 3%. Adjust within ~40% range. The composition for forming a liquid crystal layer used in the present invention may be added to a compound other than the above in the range which does not impair the object of the present invention. The compound which can be added is, for example, a polyester (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyester prepolymer obtained by condensing a polyol with a monobasic acid or a polybasic acid with (meth)acrylic acid; After the two isocyanate groups are reacted with each other, 'the reaction product and the poly(meth)acrylate obtained by (meth)acrylic acid; the bisphenol A type epoxy resin, the biguanide F type epoxy Resin, novolak type epoxy resin, polycarboxylic acid polyglycid vinegar, polyol polyglycidyl ether, aliphatic or alicyclic epoxy resin, amine epoxy resin, trisphenol methane epoxy resin, dihydroxybenzene -81 - 201106060 A photopolymerizable compound such as an epoxy (meth) acrylate or a acrylic acid group or a methacrylic acid group, which is obtained by reacting an epoxy resin such as an epoxy resin with (meth)acrylic acid The photopolymerizable liquid crystal compound, such as a key salt or a fluorinated acrylate polymer described in JP-A-2007-45993, is a composition for forming a liquid crystal layer according to the present invention, and the amount of such a compound is added. Selected object without affecting the scope of the present invention, a general, the liquid crystal layer of the present invention is formed of 40% of the composition is preferably less, more preferably 20% or less. By adding these compounds, the hardenability of the liquid crystal material in the present invention is enhanced, the mechanical strength of the obtained liquid crystal layer is increased, and the stability is improved. Further, a surfactant for forming a liquid crystal layer in which a solvent is blended may be added with a surfactant or the like in order to facilitate coating. The surfactant which can be added is, for example, a cationic surfactant such as an imidazoline, a quaternary ammonium salt, an alkylamine oxide or a polyamine derivative; a polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene condensate, a primary or secondary alcohol; Hydroxyethyl ester, alkylphenol hydroxyethyl ester, polyethylene glycol and ester thereof, sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, alkyl-substituted aromatic sulfonate, alkyl phosphate An anionic surfactant such as an aliphatic or aromatic sulfonic acid formal water condensate; an amphoteric surfactant such as lauryl guanamine propyl betaine or lauryl acetoxy betaine; polyethylene glycol fatty acid ester Nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkylamines; perfluoroalkyl sulfonates, perfluoroalkyl carboxylates, perfluoroalkyl ethylene oxide adducts, perfluoroalkyl three Methylammonium salt, oligomer containing perfluoroalkyl group, hydrophilic group, oligomer containing perfluoroalkyl group, oleophilic group, urethane containing perfluoroalkyl group, etc. -82- 201106060 A fluorine-based surfactant or the like. The amount of the surfactant to be added depends on the type of the surfactant, the type of the liquid crystal material, the type of the solvent, and the type of the alignment film of the coating solution, and the polymerizable liquid crystal material contained in the solution is 1〇1? ) 111 to 10% is better, more preferably 1 0 0 ppm to 5 % 'better than 0 · 1 to 1% of the range. Examples of the method of applying the composition for forming a liquid crystal layer include a spin coating method, a roll coating method, a printing method, a dip-drawing method, a die coating method, a casting method, a bar coating method, and a blade coating method. Method, spray coating method, gravure coating method, reverse roll coating method 'or extrusion coating method, and the like. After the composition for forming a liquid crystal layer is applied, the solvent is removed, for example, air-dried by heat removal or reduced pressure, or may be removed by a combination of these methods. The solvent is removed to form a layer that fixes the liquid crystal alignment. The step of hardening the polymerizable liquid crystal material is to impart heat energy for curing the polymerizable liquid crystal material, but it is usually hardened by irradiating ionizing radiation having the ability to generate polymerization. If necessary, a polymerization initiator may be contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal material. The ionizing radiation is not particularly limited as long as it can polymerize the polymerizable liquid crystal material. However, ultraviolet light or visible light is preferably used from the viewpoint of easiness of the device, etc., and light having a wavelength of 150 to 500 nm is preferable. Preferably, the wavelength is from 250 to 450 nm, more preferably from 300 to 400 nm. In the present invention, a method of performing radical polymerization by irradiating ultraviolet rays (UV) as an active radiation by a polymerization initiator to generate radicals by ultraviolet rays is preferred. The use of UV as a method of active radiation is an established technique, so it includes a polymerization initiator to be used, and can be easily applied to the present invention. -83-201106060 A light source for irradiating the ultraviolet light, for example, a low-pressure mercury lamp (sterilization, lamp, fluorescent light) Chemical lamps, black lamps), high-pressure discharge lamps (high-pressure mercury lamps, metal halide lamps) or short arc discharge lamps (ultra-high pressure mercury lamps, xenon lamps, mercury lamps). It is recommended to use metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, and the like. The intensity of the shot can be appropriately adjusted depending on the composition of the polymerizable liquid crystal material used for forming the liquid crystal alignment layer or the amount of the photopolymerization initiator. The alignment fixation step of irradiating the active radiation is performed by the treatment temperature in the step of forming the upper % liquid crystal layer formation layer, that is, the temperature condition in which the polymerizable liquid crystal material becomes the liquid crystal phase, and may be used lower than the liquid crystal phase. In the case of the above liquid crystal display device 1 D, it is a matter of course that the first optical compensation layer 3D has the biaxial film 30 and the positive C. Since the liquid crystal layer 31 of the board has a laminated structure, in comparison with the case where the first optical compensation layer is formed of a single layer, in order to exhibit the effect of widening the viewing angle, the magnitude of the phase difference necessary to be applied to the optical compensation layer can be remarkably reduced. Specifically, when the first optical compensation layer is formed in a single layer, in order to exhibit the viewing angle expansion effect, it is necessary to provide a very large phase difference of the retardation 値Ro Lan 27 5 to the optical compensation layer, and the first optical compensation layer 3D is In the entire optical compensation layer 3D, a viewing angle expansion effect can be exhibited as long as a phase difference of 1⁄2 or less is given by the delay 値Ro = 50 to 100. Therefore, unlike the case where the first optical compensation layer is formed of a single layer, it is possible to prevent the optical compensation layer from increasing due to the influence of slight optical axis deviation in the plane, so that the -84-201106060 low phase difference unevenness can be maintained. High frontal contrast (see example). In the second embodiment, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is described with reference to the liquid crystal display device 1D shown in Fig. 2(a), but may be the liquid crystal display device 1E shown in Fig. 2(b). The liquid crystal display device 1E of FIG. 2(b) is formed by laminating the first polarizer 2, the liquid crystal layer 31 of the first optical compensation layer 3D, the biaxial film 30, and the liquid crystal cell from the identification side toward the backlight side. 4. The second optical compensation layer 5 and the second polarizer 6, and the absorption axis 2J of the first polarizer 2 is parallel to the slow axis 30J of the biaxial film 30, and the absorption axis 2J of the first polarizer 2 is 2 The absorption axis 6 of the polarizer 6 is orthogonal, and the slow axis 30J of the biaxial film 30 and the absorption axis 6 of the second polarizer 6 are orthogonal to each other. However, in this Figure 2 (b), the backlight is on the lower side of the figure, but it can also be the upper side. Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described first and second embodiments, and can be appropriately changed or improved. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of Figs. 1 and 2, and may include other members. For example, a color filter may be disposed between the liquid crystal cell 4 and the polarizers 2, 6. An antireflection treatment or a hard coat may be applied to the surfaces of the protective films of the polarizers 2 and 6. Further, it is also possible to use a person who imparts conductivity to the constituent members. When used as a transmissive type, a backlight having a cold cathode or a hot cathode fluorescent tube, or a light emitting diode, a field effect emitting element, and an electroluminescence element as a light source can be disposed on the back surface. At this time, the arrangement of the backlight may be on the upper side of FIGS. 1 and 2 or on the lower side. Further, a reflective polarizing plate or a diffusing plate, a crucible sheet or a light guide plate may be disposed between the liquid crystal cell 4 and the backlight. As described above, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention may be of a reflective type. In this case, only one of the polarizing plates may be disposed on the identification side, or on the back side of the liquid crystal cell 4 or the lower side of the liquid crystal cell 4 -85-201106060 The inner surface is provided with a reflective film. Of course, the light before the use of the aforementioned light source can be set on the identification side of the liquid crystal cell. [Embodiment] Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described by way of Examples and Comparative Examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. <<Production of Optical Compensation Film Z1-Z9>> Optical compensation films Z1 to Z9 shown in Table 1 below were produced as samples of the first optical compensation film 3 in the above embodiment. • 86 - 201106060 [一嗽] Liquid crystal film thickness (μιη) (N &lt;N oo o T—H 1 &lt;N cn substrate film thickness (μηι) oo cn in VO ^T) 褂^ 〇r—^ ο O CO rn 1-H 〇T—H o Adding dose (parts by mass) 1 mmmm 1 m Additive 1 Additive 2 Additive 2 Additive 2 Additive 2 1 Additive 2 Adding dose (parts by mass) Ο Ο ooo 〇o Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Additive 1 Resin c PQ CQ CQ PQ U PQ Substrate CN &lt; cn ^ inch &lt; ^T) &lt; 00 &lt; 〇 \ &lt; Film Z1 Film Z2 Film Z3 Film Z4 N Puff M film Z8 film Z9 -87- 201106060 (Preparation of cellulose ester mixture) Cellulose ester A (cellulose acetate propionate) 100 parts by mass of additive 1 1 1 0 parts by mass of dimerized methane 3 00 5 parts by mass of ethanol, the above components were placed in a sealed container, and the mixture was completely dissolved by heating and stirring, and then filtered using an Augmentation filter paper No. 24, which was prepared by using an Anisin filter paper, to prepare a cellulose ester mixture. This mixture was filtered using finemet NF manufactured by Nippon Seisaku Co., Ltd. However, the above cellulose ester A means a cellulose ester having an ethyl ketone group substitution degree of 1.6, and a propylene group substitution degree of 0.9, as shown in the following Table 2. The above-mentioned additive oxime is a sugar ester compound represented by the following compound 3, as shown in Table 3 below. [Table 2] Cellulose ester ethyl sulfonyl group degree of substitution Total thiol group substitution degree A acetyl group 1.6, propyl fluorenyl group 0.9 2.5 B acetamyl group 1.9, propyl fluorenyl group 0.7 2.6 C acetyl group 2.4, poly ε- Ester group 0.3 2.7 D Ethyl 2.9 2.9 [Table 3] Additive additive 1 Sugar ester compound 3 Additive 2 Acrylic compound DSP 値 rising agent 1 Square fragrant terminal polyester compound 18 'DSP 値 rising agent 2 (Special opening 2007 -2491 Interesting formula (II) exemplified compound 334) -88- 201106060 Compound 3

ό II •c -Ο 平均取代度7.0 (二氧化矽分散稀釋液之調製) AEROSIL 972V(曰本 AEROSIL(股)製)10 質量份 (―次粒子的平均粒徑16nm、表觀比重90g/L) 乙醇 80質量份 以上成分使用溶解器攪拌混合30分鐘後,以Manton-Gaulin (高壓分散裝置)進行分散,調製二氧化矽分散稀 釋液。分散後的液濁度爲200ppm。將80質量份之二氯甲烷 在攪拌狀態下投入於此二氧化矽分散液中,使用溶解器攪 拌混合3 0分鐘,製作二氧化矽分散稀釋液。 (膠漿液1之調製) 相對於如上述得到的纖維素酯混合物1 〇〇質量份,添 加1 〇質量份的二氧化矽分散稀釋液,充分攪拌製成膠漿液 (光學補償薄膜Z1之基材薄膜A1之製作) 使用帶狀流延裝置,以溫度35°C、以1 8 00mm寬度將膠 漿液1均勻地流延於不銹鋼帶支持體上。以不銹鋼帶支持 體使溶劑蒸發直到殘留溶劑量變成1 〇〇%爲止,自不銹鋼帶 支持體上剝離。使剝離後之纖維素酯薄膜之纖維網的溶劑 -89- 201106060 以55°C蒸發,施加140〜160°C的熱同時使用拉幅器在寬度方 向延伸1.40倍。延伸開始時的殘留溶劑量爲1 5%。然後, 以多數的滾筒搬運13 0°C的乾燥區域,同時使其乾燥完成 ,對薄膜兩端施加寬度1 5 mm、平均高度1 Ομηι的壓花( Knurling )力□工,以捲取初期張力22ON/m、最終張力 110N/m捲繞於捲芯,得到乾燥膜厚60μιη之光學補償薄膜 Ζ1的基材薄膜(二軸性薄膜)Α1。 (光學補償薄膜Ζ2〜5、8、9之基材薄膜Α2〜5、8、9之 製作) 如上述表1所示,除改變纖維素酯種、添加劑種、添 加劑量 '膜厚、對寬方向之延伸倍率外,幾乎與基材薄膜 Α1同樣調製膠漿液後,製作光學補償薄膜Ζ2-5、8、9之基 材薄膜Α2~5、 8、 9。 但是表1中,「樹脂」欄中之「Β」、「C」係表示上 述表2之纖維素酯B、C,其中C具體而言係使用葡萄糖單 位1莫耳,進行接枝之ε-己內酯的平均莫耳數(MS)爲 0.72、接枝鏈(接枝的己內酯)之平均取代度(DS)爲 0.3、接枝鏈之ε-己內酯的平均聚合度(DPn)爲5.4、羥基 之平均取代度D S ( Ο Η )爲0.3者。此外,「添加劑種」欄 中之「添加劑2」係表示上述表3的添加劑2 (丙烯酸系化 合物),具體而言,表示如下述合成的丙烯酸系化合物。 〔丙烯酸系化合物之合成〕 -90- 201106060 在附有攪拌機、2個滴液漏斗、氣體導入管及溫度計 之玻璃燒瓶中,投入下述表4記載之種類及比率(莫耳比 例)之單體Xa、Xb混合液4〇g、鏈轉移劑之氫硫基丙酸2g 及甲本30g’然後升溫至90C。其後,從其中之—的滴液 漏斗將表4記載之種類及比率(莫耳比例)之單體Xa、Xb 混合液60g花費3小時滴下’同時自另—漏斗將溶解於甲苯 l4g之偶氮雙異丁腈〇.4g花費3小時滴下。然後,再將溶解 於甲苯56g之偶氮雙異丁腈0.6g花費2小時滴下後,持續反 應2小時得到聚合物X。所得之聚合物X係常溫下爲固體。 聚合物X之重量平均分子量係藉由下述測定法如表4所示。 〔表4〕 聚合物 Xa Xb 聚合平均分子量 單體種類 比率(%) 單體種類 比率(%) MMA 80 HEA 20 4500 表4記載之MM A、HE A係分別爲以下化合物的簡稱。 MMA:甲基丙烯酸甲酯 HE A :2-羥基乙基丙烯酸酯 (重量平均分子量測定) 重量平均分子量之測定係使用凝膠滲透色譜法來測定 測定條件係如下述。 -91 - 201106060 溶劑:二氯甲烷 柱:Shodex K806、K80 5、K8 03 G (昭和電工(股)製 3 支連接使用) 柱溫度:2 5 °C 試料濃度:〇 . 1質量% 檢測器:RI Model 504 ( GL Science公司製) 幫浦:L60 00 (日立製作所(股)製) 流量:1 · Oml/min 校正曲線:使用依照標準聚苯乙烯STK standard聚苯 乙烯(東曹(股)製)Mw=1000000〜5〇〇爲止之13試料之 校正曲線。1 3試料係大致等間隔使用。 &lt;光學補償薄膜Z1之製作&gt; 在如上述所得之基材薄膜A1上形成中間層、液晶層, 如上述表1所示製作、光學補償薄膜Z1。 (中間層之形成) 25質量份 290質量份 685質量份 〇.〇5質量份 胺基甲酸酯丙烯酸酯寡聚物 (UV-7510B日本合成化學(股)) 丙二醇單甲醚 異丙醇 光聚合引發劑 (LucirinTPO ( BASF (股)製)) -92- 201106060 使用金屬線棒#3將此塗佈液塗佈於基材薄膜A1上,以 8〇°C乾燥30秒後,紫外線以120mJ/mm照射10秒進行硬化形 成中間層。乾燥後之中間層的膜厚爲0.5 μπι。 (液晶層(各向異性層)之形成) 紫外線聚合性液晶材料 20質量份 (UCL0 18大日本油墨化學工業(股)製) 丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯 80質量份 光聚合引發劑 〇.〇4質量份 (LucirinTPO ( BASF (股)製)) 受阻胺 〇 · 〇 2質量份 LS-765 (三共lifetec股份公司製) 垂直配向劑 〇 . 〇 3質量份 (信越 Silicon (股)製X-22-161A) 將此聚合性液晶層塗佈液藉由模塗佈機塗佈於前述中 間層上。在80°C氣氛下加熱乾燥1分鐘直到液晶層之溫度 成爲65 °C爲止,然後急速冷卻至28 °C,使液晶材料配向。 預先確認紫外線聚合性液晶化合物之固體-液晶相轉 移溫度爲23°C ’液晶相-等方性液體相轉移溫度爲7〇°c。 使液晶材料配向後’對於液晶層,以氧濃度0.2%、溫 度2 8 °C下’照射2 5 0 m J / m m之紫外線1 〇秒,使聚合性液晶組 成物硬化形成液晶層。液晶層之厚度爲1.2μηι。 -93 - 201106060 &lt;光學補償薄膜Z2〜4 ’ 8 ’ 9之製作&gt; 如上述表1所示,使用基材薄膜A2〜4、8、9,改變液 晶膜厚外,大致與光學補償薄膜z 1同樣製作光學補償薄膜 Z 2 〜4、 8、9。 &lt;光學補償薄膜Z5之製作&gt; 如上述表1所示,直接將基材薄膜A 5作爲光學補償薄 膜Z5使用。 &lt;光學補償薄膜Z6之製作&gt; 除了寬方向的延伸倍率改爲1·〇1倍、膜厚爲150um外 ,與基材薄膜A2同樣製作的薄膜A6之兩側,介於丙烯酸 系黏著劑層(厚度1 5 μιη )貼合收縮性薄膜(東麗(股)製 、商品名「torayfanB02873 ) »然後,使用輥延伸機保持 薄膜長度方向,在180°C之空氣循環式烘箱內,在長度方 向延伸1.5倍後,將上述收縮性薄膜與上述丙烯酸系黏著 劑層一同剝離,製作光學補償薄膜Z6。 &lt;光學補償薄膜Z7之製作&gt; 在 ZEONORZF-14-lOO (平均折射率=1.52 ' Tg=136°C 、Ro = 3.〇nm、Rth = 5.0nm (股)oputesu 製)之兩側,介於 丙烯酸系黏著劑層(厚度15μπι)貼合收縮性薄膜(東麗( 股)製、商品名「t〇rayfanB02873」)。其後,使用輥延 伸機保持薄膜長度方向,在146 eC之空氣循環式烘箱內, -94- 201106060 述收縮性薄膜與上 學補償薄膜Z7。 在長度方向延伸1 . 3 8倍,延伸後,將 述丙烯酸系黏著劑層一同剝離,製作 C1〜C8作爲上述實施 《光學補償薄膜C1〜C8之製作》 製作以下表5所示之光學補償薄膜 形態之第2光學補償薄膜5之試料。 -95- 201106060 〔s谳〕 膜厚 (μιη) S § § 倍率TD (倍率) 1.18 1.17 1.20 1.15 1.24 1.19 1.20 1 1.18 i 倍率MD (倍率) 〇〇 1-^ 1.17 1.20 1.15 1.14 1.19 1.20 00 τ-Η 1-H 添加劑量 (質量份) 00 m m m m m 添加劑種 DSP値上昇劑1 DSP値上昇劑2 DSP値上昇劑2 DSP値上昇劑2 DSP値上昇劑2 DSP値上昇劑2 添加劑2 DSP値上昇劑2 添加劑量 (質量份) 〇 1 1 1 1 1 〇 1 添加劑種 添加劑1 1 1 1 1 1 添加劑1 1 樹脂 1_ CQ Q Q Q Q Q 0Q Q 薄膜C1 薄膜C2 薄膜C3 薄膜C4 薄膜C5 薄膜C6 薄膜C7 薄膜C8 厄枳魃«: α一※ 叵枳鹋1«: aw※ -96- 201106060 具體而言,除了改變纖維素酯種、添加劑種、添加劑 量、膜厚,拉幅器之寬度方向延伸後,施加搬送張力,也 對於長度方向進行延伸外,與基材薄膜A 1之製作同樣製作 光學補償薄膜C 1 ~C8。表5中之添加材種係如表3所示, DSP値上昇劑1係表示芳香族末端聚酯系化合物18,而DSP 値上昇劑係表示三嗪系化合物。 《光學補償薄膜之評價》 &lt;延遲値Ro,Rth之測定&gt; 使用自動雙折射率計(王子計測機器(股)製、 KOBRA-21 ADH )奁測定光學補償薄膜Z 1〜Z9,C 1〜C 8之延 遲値。 具體而言,將光學補償薄膜於23°C、5 5%RH環境下, 於波長爲590nm下測定10處進行3次元之折射率測定,計算 折射率nx、ny、nz的平均値後,依據下式算出面內方向的 延遲値Ro、厚度方向的延遲値Rth。結果如下表6所示。ό II • c - Ο average degree of substitution 7.0 (modulation of cerium oxide dispersion diluent) AEROSIL 972V (manufactured by AE AEROSIL) 10 parts by mass (the average particle size of secondary particles is 16 nm, and the apparent specific gravity is 90 g/L) 80 parts by mass or more of ethanol was stirred and mixed for 30 minutes using a dissolver, and then dispersed by Manton-Gaulin (high pressure dispersing device) to prepare a cerium oxide dispersion diluent. The liquid turbidity after dispersion was 200 ppm. 80 parts by mass of methylene chloride was placed in the cerium oxide dispersion under stirring, and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes using a dissolver to prepare a cerium oxide dispersion diluent. (Preparation of the dope 1) 1 part by mass of the cerium oxide dispersion diluted with respect to the cellulose ester mixture obtained as described above, and sufficiently stirred to prepare a sizing liquid (the substrate of the optical compensation film Z1) Production of Film A1) Using a belt casting apparatus, the dope 1 was uniformly cast on a stainless steel belt support at a temperature of 35 ° C and a width of 1 800 mm. The solvent was evaporated with a stainless steel belt support until the residual solvent amount became 1 〇〇%, and peeled off from the stainless steel belt support. The solvent -89-201106060 of the fiber web of the peeled cellulose ester film was evaporated at 55 ° C, and heat of 140 to 160 ° C was applied while extending 140.00 times in the width direction using a tenter. The amount of residual solvent at the beginning of the extension was 1 5%. Then, the drying zone of 130 ° C was conveyed by a plurality of rollers while drying was completed, and an embossing force of a width of 15 mm and an average height of 1 Ομηι was applied to both ends of the film to wind up the initial tension. 22ON/m and a final tension of 110 N/m were wound around a winding core to obtain a base film (biaxial film) Α1 of an optical compensation film Ζ1 having a dry film thickness of 60 μm. (Production of base film Α2 to 5, 8, and 9 of optical compensation film Ζ2 to 5, 8, and 9) As shown in Table 1 above, except for changing cellulose ester type, additive type, and additive amount, film thickness and width were In the same manner as the stretching ratio of the direction, the base film Α2 to 5, 8, and 9 of the optical compensation film Ζ 2-5, 8, and 9 were prepared almost in the same manner as in the case of the base film Α1. However, in Table 1, "Β" and "C" in the "resin" column indicate the cellulose esters B and C of the above Table 2, wherein C specifically uses a glucose unit of 1 mol, and grafts ε- The average molar number (MS) of caprolactone is 0.72, the average degree of substitution (DS) of the graft chain (grafted caprolactone) is 0.3, and the average degree of polymerization of ε-caprolactone of the graft chain (DPn) ) is 5.4, and the average degree of substitution of hydroxyl groups DS ( Ο Η ) is 0.3. In addition, the "additive 2" in the "additive type" column indicates the additive 2 (acrylic compound) of the above Table 3, and specifically, the acrylic compound synthesized as follows. [Synthesis of Acrylic Compound] -90- 201106060 In a glass flask equipped with a stirrer, two dropping funnels, a gas introduction tube, and a thermometer, the monomer and the ratio (mol ratio) described in Table 4 below were charged. 4 〇g of Xa and Xb, 2 g of thiopropyl propionic acid of chain transfer agent, and 30 g of carbendate were then heated to 90 °C. Thereafter, 60 g of the mixture of the monomers Xa and Xb of the type and ratio (molar ratio) described in Table 4 was dropped from the dropping funnel described therein for 3 hours while the funnel was dissolved in toluene of 4 g. Nitrogen diisobutyronitrile 〇.4g took 3 hours to drip. Then, 0.6 g of azobisisobutyronitrile dissolved in 56 g of toluene was added dropwise for 2 hours, and the reaction was continued for 2 hours to obtain a polymer X. The obtained polymer X was a solid at normal temperature. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is shown in Table 4 by the following measurement method. [Table 4] Polymer Xa Xb Polymerization average molecular weight Monomer type Ratio (%) Monomer type Ratio (%) MMA 80 HEA 20 4500 The MM A and HE A systems described in Table 4 are abbreviations of the following compounds. MMA: methyl methacrylate HE A : 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (measurement of weight average molecular weight) The measurement of the weight average molecular weight was carried out by gel permeation chromatography. The measurement conditions are as follows. -91 - 201106060 Solvent: Dichloromethane column: Shodex K806, K80 5, K8 03 G (Show connection of 3 joints of Showa Denko Co., Ltd.) Column temperature: 2 5 °C Sample concentration: 〇. 1 mass% Detector: RI Model 504 (made by GL Science) Pump: L60 00 (Hitachi, Ltd.) Flow: 1 · Oml/min Calibration curve: used in accordance with standard polystyrene STK standard polystyrene (Tosoh Corporation) ) The calibration curve of 13 samples up to Mw=1000000~5〇〇. 1 3 Samples are used at approximately equal intervals. &lt;Production of Optical Compensation Film Z1&gt; An intermediate layer and a liquid crystal layer were formed on the base film A1 obtained as described above, and an optical compensation film Z1 was produced as shown in Table 1 above. (Formation of intermediate layer) 25 parts by mass of 290 parts by mass of 685 parts by mass of 〇.〇5 parts by mass of urethane acrylate oligomer (UV-7510B Japan Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.) Propylene glycol monomethyl ether isopropanol light Polymerization initiator (Lucirin TPO (made by BASF)) -92- 201106060 This coating liquid was applied onto the base film A1 using a metal wire bar #3, and dried at 8 ° C for 30 seconds, and then ultraviolet rays were 120 mJ. /mm irradiation for 10 seconds to harden to form an intermediate layer. The film thickness of the intermediate layer after drying was 0.5 μm. (Formation of liquid crystal layer (anisotropic layer)) 20 parts by mass of ultraviolet polymerizable liquid crystal material (manufactured by UCL0 18 Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 80 parts by mass of photopolymerization initiator 〇.〇 4 parts by mass (LucirinTPO (made by BASF)) hindered amine 〇 · 〇 2 parts by mass LS-765 (made by Sankyo Lifetec Co., Ltd.) Vertical alignment agent 〇. 〇 3 parts by mass (Shin-Etsu Silicon Co., Ltd. X-22) -161A) This polymerizable liquid crystal layer coating liquid was applied onto the intermediate layer by a die coater. The film was heated and dried in an atmosphere of 80 ° C for 1 minute until the temperature of the liquid crystal layer became 65 ° C, and then rapidly cooled to 28 ° C to align the liquid crystal material. The solid-liquid crystal phase shift temperature of the ultraviolet-polymerizable liquid crystal compound was previously confirmed to be 23 ° C. The liquid crystal phase - the isotropic liquid phase transition temperature was 7 ° C. After the liquid crystal material was aligned, the ultraviolet ray of 2500 mJ / m m was irradiated to the liquid crystal layer at an oxygen concentration of 0.2% and a temperature of 28 ° C for 1 sec., and the polymerizable liquid crystal composition was cured to form a liquid crystal layer. The thickness of the liquid crystal layer was 1.2 μm. -93 - 201106060 &lt;Production of Optical Compensation Films Z2 to 4' 8 '9&gt; As shown in Table 1 above, the substrate films A2 to 4, 8, and 9 were used to change the thickness of the liquid crystal film, and the optical compensation film was substantially The optical compensation films Z 2 to 4, 8, and 9 were also produced in the same manner as z 1 . &lt;Production of Optical Compensation Film Z5&gt; As shown in Table 1 above, the base film A 5 was directly used as the optical compensation film Z5. &lt;Production of Optical Compensation Film Z6&gt; In addition to the stretching ratio in the width direction being changed to 1·〇1 and the film thickness being 150 μm, both sides of the film A6 produced in the same manner as the base film A2 were interposed with an acrylic adhesive. The layer (thickness 15 μmη) is bonded to a shrinkable film (manufactured by Toray Industries, Ltd., trade name "torayfan B02873"). Then, the length of the film is maintained by a roll stretching machine, and the length is in an air circulating oven at 180 ° C. After the direction was extended 1.5 times, the shrinkable film was peeled off together with the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to prepare an optical compensation film Z6. <Production of Optical Compensation Film Z7> In ZEONORZF-14-100 (average refractive index = 1.52 ' Tg = 136 ° C, Ro = 3. 〇 nm, Rth = 5.0 nm (share) oputesu) on both sides, between the acrylic adhesive layer (thickness 15μπι) bonded shrink film (Dongli (share) system The product name is "t〇rayfanB02873"). Thereafter, a roll stretching machine was used to maintain the length direction of the film, and in the air circulating oven of 146 eC, the shrink film and the compensation film Z7 were used. After extending in the longitudinal direction by 1.38 times, the acrylic adhesive layer was peeled off together, and C1 to C8 were produced as the above-mentioned "production of optical compensation films C1 to C8". The optical compensation film shown in the following Table 5 was produced. A sample of the second optical compensation film 5 of the form. -95- 201106060 〔s谳〕 Film thickness (μιη) S § § Magnification TD (magnification) 1.18 1.17 1.20 1.15 1.24 1.19 1.20 1 1.18 i magnification MD (magnification) 〇〇1-^ 1.17 1.20 1.15 1.14 1.19 1.20 00 τ- Η 1-H Adding dose (parts by mass) 00 mmmmm Additive type DSP 値 rising agent 1 DSP 値 rising agent 2 DSP 値 rising agent 2 DSP 値 rising agent 2 DSP 値 rising agent 2 DSP 値 rising agent 2 Additive 2 DSP 値 rising agent 2 Adding dose (parts by mass) 〇1 1 1 1 1 〇1 Additive additive 1 1 1 1 1 1 Additive 1 1 Resin 1_ CQ QQQQQ 0Q Q Film C1 Film C2 Film C3 Film C4 Film C5 Film C6 Film C7 Film C8枳魃«: α一※ 叵枳鹋1«: aw※ -96- 201106060 Specifically, in addition to changing the cellulose ester species, additive species, additive amount, and film thickness, the width of the tenter is extended and then transported. The optical compensation films C 1 to C 8 were produced in the same manner as in the production of the base film A 1 except that the tension was also extended in the longitudinal direction. The additive materials in Table 5 are shown in Table 3. The DSP 値 rising agent 1 indicates the aromatic terminal polyester compound 18, and the DSP 値 rising agent indicates the triazine compound. <<Evaluation of Optical Compensation Film>> &lt;Measurement of Delay 値Ro, Rth&gt; Measurement of optical compensation films Z 1 to Z9, C 1 using an automatic birefringence meter (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd., KOBRA-21 ADH) ~C 8 delay 値. Specifically, the optical compensation film is measured at a temperature of 23 ° C and 5 5% RH at a wavelength of 590 nm, and the refractive index of the three-dimensional element is measured, and the average enthalpy of the refractive indices nx, ny, and nz is calculated. The following equation calculates the retardation 値Ro in the in-plane direction and the retardation 値Rth in the thickness direction. The results are shown in Table 6 below.

Ro= ( nx-ny) χ dRo= ( nx-ny) χ d

Rth={ ( nx + ny) /2-nz} xd 式中,Ro係表示薄膜面內延遲値,Rth係表示薄膜厚 度方向延遲値,nx係表示薄膜面內之遲相軸方向的折射率 ,ny係表示薄膜面內之進相軸方向的折射率,nz係表示薄 膜的厚度方向的折射率,d係表示薄膜的厚度(nm )。 -97- 201106060 i 比較例 Ζ15 I s S I 120; I ! 0.96 | 1 C12 | eg o o 1 105 I X 0 &lt; ο 'Τ&quot;· 比較例 I Ζ17 I Ο «SJ o I r-01 I | cia | c〇 〇 T·.. | 300 | I 105 1 ◎ X X Φ 比較例 rwi β 1 270 1 〇 丨 1.0.1 1 I如.| o I 300 | I 0.93 | ◎ X X CO 1本發明1 1 Z-18 1 s un o CM a&gt; I G12 | 3 o 1 ι-os I ® ◎ 卜 本發明 &lt;〇. s 〇 CM b S 〇&gt; 〇 | C1.6 I 8 r~ | 300 | 丨 1_〇5.- 1 ◎ o o &lt;b 1本發明1 1 Z12 I s U&gt; o. TJ·- 1 0.96 | ll to 〇 S 〇 CO 1 105 1 &lt; ◎ &lt; ιο 1本發明1 I Ζί9 I cr&gt; N in o to | 0.96 | i 012 I δ o s CSJ 1 1-05 I &lt; ◎ ◎ 1本發明1 I Z14_ I M S s 1 I G14 | p o g I 105 1 &lt;1 ό ◎ CO 丨本發明丨 I Z13、」 IO o CJ4 1 0.96 | 1 .'C13_l ¢0 〇 CM \ 360 | m 〇· &lt;i ◎ ◎ CsJ 1本發明1 l. Z12__J JO '〇 丁 | 0.96 | 1 Cl 2 1 CNI o o 1 250 | m p ◎ ◎ ◎ τ» 1本發明1 zir: 1 N IO .〇 | 0.85 | 11 »7- o § .C&gt;J 1 1-01 1 ◎ ◎ ◎ 0 2 備註 1 嗶 ,^o i m Ro1 Rth1 DSP(Rol) 1偏光板No 1 I薄腠No 1 1 R02_ I Rtb2 DSR(Rth2) 視角 正面CR 斜方向之色彩偏移 液晶顯不 裝置 第1 光學補償層 J光板 I m 光學補償層 評價 -98 - 201106060 由上述表6之第1光學補償層的延遲値Rol、Rthl的値 得知’本發明之光學補償薄膜Z1~Z4、Z6、Z8、Z9係因滿 足 Ro&gt;0、且-R〇/2&lt;Rth&lt;Ro/2,因此滿足 nxl&gt;nzl&gt;nyl (:式 (1 ) ) ° 由第2光學補償層之延遲値R〇2、Rth2的値得知,本發 明之光學補償薄膜C1〜C6係因Ro2〇且Rth&gt;Ro/2,因此滿足 nx2$ny2&gt;nz2 (:式(2 ) ) ° 此外,上述本發明之液晶顯示裝置1〜8所用的光學補 償層係波長分散性爲滿足DSP ( Rol ) &lt;1&lt;DSP ( Rth2 )(: 式(3 ))者。 《偏光板之製作》 將厚度120μηι之聚乙烯醇薄膜進行一軸延伸(溫度 1 1(TC、延伸倍率5倍)。將此浸漬於由碘〇.〇75g、碘化鉀 5g、水100g所構成的水溶液中50秒,接著浸漬於由碘化鉀 6g、硼酸7.5g、水l〇〇g所構成之68°C的水溶液中。然後, 經水洗、乾燥得到偏光子。 其次,依據下述步驟1〜5,在偏光子的表面側貼合光 學補償薄膜Z1〜9或光學補償薄膜C1〜8,在內面側貼合 Κ ο n i c a M i η ο 11 a T a c K C 4 U Y ( Κ ο n i c a M i η ο 11 a Ο p t 〇 (股)製 纖維素酯薄膜)貼合偏光板保護薄膜,製作偏光板zil〜19 ,Cl 1〜18。但是光學補償薄膜Zl~4、8、9係基材薄膜側成 爲偏光子側(液晶層側爲偏光子之反側)的狀態貼合於偏 光子。 -99- 201106060 步驟1:將薄膜(光學補償薄膜、纖維素酯薄膜)浸漬 於60°C之2mol/L的氫氧化鈉水溶液90秒,接著水洗、乾燥 ,得到與偏光子貼合側經皂化後的薄膜。 步驟2:將上述偏光子浸漬於固體成份2質量%之聚乙烯 醇接著劑槽中1至2秒。 步驟3:輕拭去在步驟2附著於偏光子之過多的接著劑 後,將此挾於步驟1處理後之光學補償薄膜與纖維素酯薄 膜之間進行層合。 步驟4:以壓力20〜30N/cm2、搬送速度約2m/分鐘貼合 步驟3所層合的層合物。 步驟5:80°C之乾燥機中,將步驟4所貼合的試料乾燥2 分鐘後,製作偏光板Z11〜19、C11〜18。 《液晶顯示裝置之製作》 將市售之32型MVA型液晶電視(SHARP製「AQUOS 32AD5」。但是「AQUOS」係註冊商標)之兩面的偏光板 予以剝離,使上述製作之偏光板Z11〜19、C 11〜18成爲如表 6之組合方式貼合於各自兩面,製作液晶顯示裝置(1)〜 (Π)。此時’該偏光板之貼合的朝向係光學補償薄膜側 (與Konica MinoltaTac KC4UY相反側)成爲液晶胞側, 且吸收軸朝向於與購入時預先貼合之偏光板相同的方向。 使用如上述製作之液晶顯示裝置(丨)〜〗丨)進行以 下評價。 -100- 201106060 《液晶顯示裝置之評價》 &lt;視角之評價&gt; 在23。(:、55 % RH之環境下,將各液晶顯示裝置之背光 連續點亮1週後,測定視角。測定係使用ELDIM公司製EZ-Contrastl60D,測定方位角 45。、135°、225°、315°、倒角 70。之方向之黑顯示與白顯示之亮度比A ’採用平均値。測 定結果依據以下基準進行評價,結果如上述表6所示。此 評價基準中,「△」表示實用上、容許範圍內者,「XJ 係表示實用上、容許範圍外者。 ® : 100&lt;A Δ:50&lt;Α ^ 1 00 x:A^50 &lt;正面對比&gt; 在23°C55%RH之環境下,將各液晶顯示裝置之背光點 亮後,測定由白顯示與黑顯示之顯示畫面之法線方向的亮 度,其比作爲正面對比,依據下述基準進行評價,結果如 上述表6所示。測定係使用Konica Minolta Sensing公司製 CS-2000。正面對比超過1 000時,評價爲優異的液晶顯示 裝置。在此評價基準中,「△」係表示實用上、容許範圍 內者,「X J係表示實用上、容許範圍外者。 正面對比=(由顯示裝置之法線方向所測定的白顯示 的亮度)/(由顯示裝置之法線方向所測定 之黑顯示的亮度) -101 - 201106060 ◎ :1000&lt;正面對比 〇:750&lt;正面對比$1000 △ :5 00〈正面對比$750 X:正面對比S500 &lt;斜方向之色彩偏移的評價&gt; 對於各液晶顯示裝置,由斜方向以複數人數之目視確 認在暗室內之黑顯示狀態,並以下述基準進行評價,結果 如上述表6所示。此評價基準中,「△」係表示實用上、 容許範圍內者,Γχ」係表示實用上、容許範圍外者。 ◎ : 10人中0人認爲有著色。 〇:1 0人中1〜2人認爲有著色。 △ :10人中3~5人認爲有著色。 x:10人中5〜10人認爲有著色。 &lt;綜合評價&gt; 由以上結果可知’本發明之實施例之液晶顯示裝置( 1 )〜(8 )係與比較例之液晶顯示裝置(9 )〜(1 1 )不同 ,可同時達成視角擴大、正面對比提高、防止由斜方向觀 看時的色彩偏移,優異的液晶顯示裝置。 檢討上述特性時,首先,V A模式之液晶胞中之棒狀 液晶所具有的Rth爲負,其波長分散爲正,爲了抵消這種 液晶胞之漏光(因液晶胞在厚度方向具有相位差所造成的 漏光)時’必須具有正的Rth,且與液晶胞同樣具有正之 -102- 201106060 波長分散之C板的光學補償層。另外,爲了補償偏光子之 漏光(2片偏光子之透過軸由斜方向觀看時,因未正交所 造成的漏光)時,較佳爲各波長下得到相同的補償效果, 隨著波長變大,相位差也變大之逆波長分散之2板的光學 補償層較適合。因此,依據將具有正之波長分散之C板的 光學補償層與逆波長分散之Z板的光學補償層予以組合之 本發明的構成時,最適合因液晶胞及偏光板所造成之漏光 補償’可同時兼顧斜向之色彩偏移、視角、正面對比。 【圖式簡單說明】 〔圖1〕表示本發明之液晶顯示裝置之槪略構成的槪 念圖。 〔圖2〕表示本發明之液晶顯示裝置之變形例之槪略 構成的槪念圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 1、1 A、1 D、1 E :液晶顯示裝置 2 :第1偏光子 3、3 D :第1光學補償層 4 ·液晶胞 5 :第2光學補償層 6 :第2偏光子 3 0 :二軸性薄膜(纖維素系樹脂層) 3 1 :液晶層 •103-Rth={ ( nx + ny) /2-nz} xd where Ro is the in-plane retardation 値 of the film, Rth is the retardation of the film thickness direction, and nx is the refractive index of the retardation axis in the plane of the film. Ny represents the refractive index in the direction of the phase in the plane of the film, nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction of the film, and d represents the thickness (nm) of the film. -97- 201106060 i Comparative Example I 15 I s SI 120; I ! 0.96 | 1 C12 | eg oo 1 105 IX 0 &lt; ο 'Τ&quot;· Comparative Example I Ζ17 I Ο «SJ o I r-01 I | cia | c〇〇T·.. | 300 | I 105 1 ◎ XX Φ Comparative example rwi β 1 270 1 〇丨1.0.1 1 I.. o I 300 | I 0.93 | ◎ XX CO 1 The invention 1 1 Z- 18 1 s un o CM a&gt; I G12 | 3 o 1 ι-os I ® ◎ The present invention &lt;〇. s 〇CM b S 〇&gt; 〇| C1.6 I 8 r~ | 300 | 丨1_ 〇5.- 1 ◎ oo &lt;b 1 The present invention 1 1 Z12 I s U&gt; o. TJ·- 1 0.96 | ll to 〇S 〇CO 1 105 1 &lt; ◎ &lt; ιο 1 The present invention 1 I Ζί9 I Cr&gt; N in o to | 0.96 | i 012 I δ os CSJ 1 1-05 I &lt; ◎ ◎ 1 invention 1 I Z14_ IMS s 1 I G14 | pog I 105 1 &lt;1 ό ◎ CO 丨 丨I Z13," IO o CJ4 1 0.96 | 1 .'C13_l ¢0 〇CM \ 360 | m 〇· &lt;i ◎ ◎ CsJ 1 invention 1 l. Z12__J JO '〇丁| 0.96 | 1 Cl 2 1 CNI oo 1 250 | mp ◎ ◎ ◎ τ» 1 invention 1 zir: 1 N IO .〇| 0.85 | 11 »7- o § .C&gt;J 1 1-01 1 ◎ ◎ ◎ 0 2 Remark 1 哔,^oim Ro 1 Rth1 DSP(Rol) 1 polarizer No 1 I thin 腠 No 1 1 R02_ I Rtb2 DSR (Rth2) Viewing angle CR Optic color shifting liquid crystal display device 1st optical compensation layer J plate I m Optical compensation layer evaluation -98 - 201106060 It is known from the delays 値Rol and Rth1 of the first optical compensation layer of Table 6 that the optical compensation films Z1 to Z4, Z6, Z8, and Z9 of the present invention satisfy Ro&gt;0 and -R 〇/2&lt;Rth&lt;Ro/2, thus satisfying nxl&gt;nzl&gt;nyl (:formula (1)) ° The optical compensation film of the present invention is known from the 値R〇2, Rth2 of the second optical compensation layer Since C1 to C6 are Ro2 and Rth&gt;Ro/2, they satisfy nx2$ny2&gt;nz2 (: (2)) ° Further, the optical compensation layer used in the liquid crystal display devices 1 to 8 of the present invention is wavelength-dispersive. To satisfy DSP ( Rol ) &lt;1 &lt; DSP ( Rth2 ) (: (3)). <<Preparation of Polarizing Plate>> A polyvinyl alcohol film having a thickness of 120 μm was subjected to one-axis stretching (temperature 1 1 (TC, stretching ratio 5 times). This was immersed in an aqueous solution composed of 75 g of iodine, 75 g of potassium iodide, and 100 g of water. After 50 seconds, it was immersed in an aqueous solution of 68 g of potassium iodide, 7.5 g of boric acid, and water 〇〇g. Then, it was washed with water and dried to obtain a polarizer. Next, according to the following steps 1 to 5, The optical compensation films Z1 to 9 or the optical compensation films C1 to 8 are bonded to the surface side of the polarizer, and the inner surface side is attached to the inner surface side. ο n nica M i η ο 11 a T ac KC 4 UY ( Κ ο nica M i η ο 11 a Ο pt 〇 (cell) cellulose ester film) adhered to the polarizing plate protective film, and made polarizing plates zil~19, Cl 1~18. However, the optical compensation film Zl~4, 8, 9 base film side became The state of the polarizer side (the liquid crystal layer side is the opposite side of the polarizer) is attached to the polarizer. -99- 201106060 Step 1: The film (optical compensation film, cellulose ester film) is immersed at 2 mol/L at 60 °C. Aqueous sodium hydroxide solution for 90 seconds, followed by washing with water, drying, and getting attached to the polarizer The saponified film is combined with the side. Step 2: The above-mentioned polarizer is immersed in a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive bath having a solid content of 2% by mass for 1 to 2 seconds. Step 3: Wipe off the excess of the polarizer attached in step 2. After the adhesive, the optical compensation film and the cellulose ester film which have been treated in the step 1 are laminated. Step 4: The bonding step is carried out at a pressure of 20 to 30 N/cm 2 and a conveying speed of about 2 m/min. Laminated laminate. Step 5: The sample adhered in step 4 is dried in a dryer at 80 ° C for 2 minutes, and then polarized plates Z11 to 19 and C11 to 18 are produced. "Production of Liquid Crystal Display Device" A commercially available 32-type MVA type liquid crystal television ("AQUOS 32AD5" manufactured by SHARP. However, the "AQUOS" registered trademark) is peeled off on both sides of the polarizing plate, and the polarizing plates Z11 to 19 and C 11 to 18 which are produced as described above are formed as a table. The combination of 6 is applied to both sides to produce a liquid crystal display device (1) to (Π). At this time, the orientation of the polarizing plate is bonded to the optical compensation film side (the side opposite to Konica MinoltaTac KC4UY) to become a liquid crystal cell side. And the absorption axis faces the polarized light that is pre-fitted with the purchase The same direction of the board was used. The following evaluation was carried out using the liquid crystal display device (丨)~〗 〖) prepared as described above. -100-201106060 "Evaluation of Liquid Crystal Display Device" &lt;Evaluation of Viewing Angle&gt; (In the environment of 5:5% RH, the backlight of each liquid crystal display device was continuously lit for one week, and the viewing angle was measured. The measurement was performed using EZ-Contrastl60D manufactured by ELDIM Co., Ltd., and the azimuth angles of 45, 135, 225, and 315 were measured. °, chamfer 70. The ratio between the black display and the white display brightness ratio A 'is average 値. The measurement results are evaluated according to the following criteria, and the results are shown in Table 6. In this evaluation criterion, "△" indicates practical use. For those who are within the allowable range, "XJ is a practical or acceptable range. ® : 100 &lt; A Δ: 50 &lt; Α ^ 1 00 x: A^50 &lt; frontal contrast &gt; 55% RH environment at 23 ° C Then, after the backlight of each liquid crystal display device was turned on, the luminance in the normal direction of the display screen of the white display and the black display was measured, and the ratio was evaluated as a frontal comparison based on the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 6 above. In the measurement system, CS-2000 manufactured by Konica Minolta Sensing Co., Ltd. was used. When the front side comparison exceeded 1 000, it was evaluated as an excellent liquid crystal display device. In the evaluation standard, "△" indicates a practical and acceptable range, "XJ series. Expressing practicality, For the outside range. Front contrast = (luminance of white display measured by the normal direction of the display device) / (luminance of black display measured by the normal direction of the display device) -101 - 201106060 ◎ : 1000 &lt; Contrast 〇: 750 &lt; front contrast $1000 △ : 5 00 < front contrast $ 750 X: front contrast S500 &lt; evaluation of color shift in oblique direction &gt; For each liquid crystal display device, it is visually confirmed by the number of people in the oblique direction in the dark direction The black display state of the room was evaluated by the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 6. In the evaluation criteria, "△" indicates a practical or acceptable range, and "Γχ" indicates a practical or acceptable range. ◎ : 0 out of 10 people think that there is coloring. 〇: 1 to 2 people in 1 0 people think that there is coloring. △: 3 to 5 people out of 10 people think that there is coloring. x: 10 to 10 in 10 people It is considered that there is coloring. <Comprehensive evaluation> From the above results, it is understood that the liquid crystal display devices (1) to (8) of the embodiment of the present invention are different from the liquid crystal display devices (9) to (1 1) of the comparative example. Can achieve simultaneous expansion of perspective, positive contrast improvement, prevention The color shift in the oblique direction is excellent, and the liquid crystal display device is excellent. When reviewing the above characteristics, first, the rod-like liquid crystal in the liquid crystal cell of the VA mode has a negative Rth and a wavelength dispersion of positive, in order to cancel the liquid crystal. The light leakage of the cell (due to the light leakage caused by the phase difference of the liquid crystal cell in the thickness direction) 'has to have a positive Rth, and has the same optical compensation layer of the C plate of the -102-201106060 wavelength dispersion as the liquid crystal cell. In addition, in order to compensate for light leakage of the polarizer (light leakage due to non-orthogonality when the transmission axes of the two polarizers are viewed from the oblique direction), it is preferable to obtain the same compensation effect at each wavelength, and the wavelength becomes larger. The optical compensation layer of the two plates in which the phase difference is also increased and the reverse wavelength is dispersed is suitable. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present invention in which the optical compensation layer of the C plate having the positive wavelength dispersion and the optical compensation layer of the Z plate which is dispersed in the reverse wavelength are combined, it is most suitable for the light leakage compensation caused by the liquid crystal cell and the polarizing plate. At the same time, it also takes into account the oblique color shift, viewing angle and front contrast. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing a schematic configuration of a liquid crystal display device of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic view showing a schematic configuration of a modification of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention. [Description of main component symbols] 1, 1 A, 1 D, 1 E : Liquid crystal display device 2 : First polarizer 3, 3 D : First optical compensation layer 4 · Liquid crystal cell 5 : Second optical compensation layer 6 : 2 polarizer 3 0 : biaxial film (cellulosic resin layer) 3 1 : liquid crystal layer • 103-

Claims (1)

201106060 七、申請專利範圍: 1. 一種液晶顯示裝置,其特徵係至少依序具有第1偏 光子、第1光學補償層、液晶胞、第2光學補償層及第2偏 光子, 前述第1及第2光學補償層係滿足下述式(1 )〜(3 ) &gt; 前述液晶胞中之液晶分子係當黑顯示時,配向於該液 晶胞之厚度方向, nxl&gt;nzl&gt;nyl (1) nx2^ny2&gt;nz2 (2) DSP ( Rol) &lt;1&lt;DSP ( Rth2) ( 3) (但是nxl係表示前述第1光學補償層之面內之遲相軸 方向的折射率,nyl係表示前述第1光學補償層之面內之進 相軸方向的折射率,nz 1係表示前述第1光學補償層之厚度 方向的折射率’ nx2係表示前述第2光學補償層之面內之遲 相軸方向的折射率’ ny2係表示前述第2光學補償層之面內 之進相軸方向的折射率,nz2係表示前述第2光學補償層之 厚度方向的折射率’ Rol係表示下式(8-1)表示之前述第 1光學補償層的面內延遲値,Rth2係表示下式(9-2)表示 之前述第2光學補償層之厚度方向的延遲値,DSP( Rol) 係前述第1光學補償層之面內延遲値ro1的波長分散値,在 波長480nm下所測定之前述第i光學補償層的面內延遲値 R〇 1除以在波長6 3 Onm下所測定之面內延遲値Ro丨的値, DSP ( Rth2 )係前述第2光學補償層之厚度方向之延遲値 -104- 201106060 Rth2的波長分散値,在波長480nm下所測定之前述第2光學 補償層的延遲値Rth2除以在波長63 Onm下所測定之延遲値 Rth2的値, R〇 1 = ( nx1-ny 1 ) x d 1 (8-1) Rth2= { ( nx2 + ny2 ) /2-nz2}xd2) (9-2) 但是dl係表示前述第1光學補償層的厚度(nm ) ,d2 係表示前述第2光學補償層的厚度(ηηι) ,R〇l及Rth2係分 別在波長5 90nm下所測定的値)。 2.如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中前述 第1光學補償層係含有纖維素系樹脂層者。 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 前述第1光學補償層係滿足下述式(4) 、(5), 前述第2光學補償層係滿足下述式(6) 、(7)者, R ο 1 = 5 0 〜1 0 0 [ n m ] ( 4 ) |Rthl | = 0〜20[nm] ( 5 ) R〇2 = 0〜20[nm] ( 6 ) Rth2 = 200〜3 50[nm] ( 7 ) (但是Rthl係表示下式(9-1 )表示之前述第i光學補 償層之厚度方向的延遲値’ R〇2係表示下式(8-2)表示之 前述第2光學補償層的面內延遲値,R〇2及Rthl係分別在波 長5 9 0 n m下所測定的値, Ro2= ( nx2-ny2) x d 2 ( 8-2) Rthl={(nxl+nyl)/2-nzl}xdl) (9_i))。 4 ·如申請專利範圍第1〜3項中任—項之液晶顯示裝置 -105- 201106060 ’其中前述第1光學補償層係至少含有纖維素系樹脂層與 液晶層, 前述纖維素系樹脂層係相較於前述液晶層,而被配設 於靠近前述第1偏光子側,具有面內相位差,同時遲相軸 對於前述第1偏光子之吸收軸爲正交者。 5 ·如申請專利範圍第1〜3項中任一項之液晶顯示裝置 ,其中前述第1光學補償層係至少含有纖維素系樹脂層與 液晶層, 前述纖維素系樹脂層係相較於前述液晶層,被配設於 靠近前述液晶胞側,具有面內相位差,同時遲相軸對於前 述第1偏光子之吸收軸爲平行者。 6 .如申請專利範圍第1〜5項中任一項之液晶顯示裝置 ,其中前述第2光學補償層係由含有DSP値上昇劑之纖維素 系樹脂層所構成者。 -106-201106060 VII. Patent application scope: 1. A liquid crystal display device characterized in that it has at least a first polarizer, a first optical compensation layer, a liquid crystal cell, a second optical compensation layer and a second polarizer, and the first and The second optical compensation layer satisfies the following formulas (1) to (3) &gt; The liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal cell are aligned in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal cell when black is displayed, nxl &gt;nzl&gt;nyl (1) nx2 ^ny2&gt;nz2 (2) DSP (Rol) &lt;1&lt;DSP(Rth2) (3) (However, nxl indicates the refractive index in the direction of the slow axis in the plane of the first optical compensation layer, and nyl indicates the foregoing a refractive index in the direction of the phase in the axial direction of the optical compensation layer, nz 1 is a refractive index in the thickness direction of the first optical compensation layer, and nx2 indicates a direction of the slow phase in the plane of the second optical compensation layer. The refractive index 'ny2' indicates the refractive index in the in-plane direction of the second optical compensation layer, and nz2 indicates the refractive index in the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer. Rol means the following formula (8-1) ) indicates the in-plane retardation of the first optical compensation layer, Rth2 The retardation 厚度 in the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer represented by the following formula (9-2), and the DSP (Rol) is the wavelength dispersion 面 of the in-plane retardation 値ro1 of the first optical compensation layer, at a wavelength of 480 nm. The in-plane retardation 値R〇1 of the ith optical compensation layer measured is divided by the in-plane retardation 値Ro丨 measured at a wavelength of 6 3 Onm, and the DSP (Rth2) is the thickness direction of the second optical compensation layer. Delay 値-104- 201106060 Rth2 wavelength dispersion 値, the retardation 値Rth2 of the second optical compensation layer measured at a wavelength of 480 nm divided by the delay 値Rth2 measured at a wavelength of 63 Onm, R〇1 = (nx1-ny 1 ) xd 1 (8-1) Rth2= { ( nx2 + ny2 ) /2-nz2}xd2) (9-2) However, dl represents the thickness (nm) of the aforementioned first optical compensation layer, d2 The thickness (ηηι) of the second optical compensation layer, R〇l and Rth2 are measured at a wavelength of 5 90 nm, respectively. 2. The liquid crystal display device of claim 1, wherein the first optical compensation layer contains a cellulose resin layer. The liquid crystal display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first optical compensation layer satisfies the following formulas (4) and (5), and the second optical compensation layer satisfies the following formula (6) , (7), R ο 1 = 5 0 〜1 0 0 [ nm ] ( 4 ) |Rthl | = 0~20[nm] ( 5 ) R〇2 = 0~20[nm] ( 6 ) Rth2 = 200 to 3 50 [nm] (7) (But Rthl represents a retardation 厚度' R〇2 in the thickness direction of the ith optical compensation layer represented by the following formula (9-1), which represents the following formula (8-2). The in-plane retardation 値 of the second optical compensation layer, R 〇 2 and Rthl are respectively measured at a wavelength of 590 nm, and Ro2 = ( nx 2 - ny 2 ) x d 2 ( 8 - 2 ) Rthl = { ( Nxl+nyl)/2-nzl}xdl) (9_i)). 4. The liquid crystal display device of any one of the first to third aspects of the invention, wherein the first optical compensation layer contains at least a cellulose resin layer and a liquid crystal layer, and the cellulose resin layer is The liquid crystal layer is disposed closer to the first polarizer side than the liquid crystal layer, and has an in-plane phase difference, and the slow axis is orthogonal to the absorption axis of the first polarizer. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first optical compensation layer contains at least a cellulose resin layer and a liquid crystal layer, and the cellulose resin layer is compared with the aforementioned The liquid crystal layer is disposed close to the liquid crystal cell side and has an in-plane phase difference, and the slow axis is parallel to the absorption axis of the first polarizer. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the second optical compensation layer is composed of a cellulose resin layer containing a DSP 値 rising agent. -106-
TW099108912A 2009-03-30 2010-03-25 Liquid crystal display device TWI486677B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2009083152 2009-03-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201106060A true TW201106060A (en) 2011-02-16
TWI486677B TWI486677B (en) 2015-06-01

Family

ID=42936091

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW099108912A TWI486677B (en) 2009-03-30 2010-03-25 Liquid crystal display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5598467B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101679444B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI486677B (en)
WO (1) WO2010116803A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110892297A (en) * 2017-07-27 2020-03-17 日东电工株式会社 Phase difference film, polarizing plate with optical compensation layer, image display device, and method for producing phase difference film

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012215706A (en) * 2011-03-31 2012-11-08 Fujifilm Corp Cellulose acylate film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
KR101800895B1 (en) * 2011-09-19 2017-11-24 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Touch screen display device and manufacturing method of the same
JP7405576B2 (en) * 2019-11-21 2023-12-26 住友化学株式会社 optically anisotropic film

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3299190B2 (en) * 1998-07-15 2002-07-08 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Liquid crystal display
JP4697775B2 (en) * 2005-01-31 2011-06-08 日東電工株式会社 Liquid crystal panel and liquid crystal display device
JP2009053684A (en) * 2007-07-30 2009-03-12 Fujifilm Corp Retardation film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device comprising it

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110892297A (en) * 2017-07-27 2020-03-17 日东电工株式会社 Phase difference film, polarizing plate with optical compensation layer, image display device, and method for producing phase difference film

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5598467B2 (en) 2014-10-01
TWI486677B (en) 2015-06-01
KR20110133036A (en) 2011-12-09
WO2010116803A1 (en) 2010-10-14
JPWO2010116803A1 (en) 2012-10-18
KR101679444B1 (en) 2016-11-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102443875B1 (en) Retardation film, production method of retardation film, laminate, composition, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
TWI336408B (en) Polarizing plate and display
KR102027009B1 (en) Liquid crystal display device
JP6622385B2 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, image display device, optical film manufacturing method and polarizing plate manufacturing method
TW200804476A (en) Cellulose acylate film, method of producing the same, cellulose derivative film, optically compensatory film using the same, optically-compensatory film incorporating polarizing plate, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP7182533B2 (en) Liquid crystal composition, optically anisotropic layer, optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
JP2008083307A (en) Polarizing plate, manufacturing method of polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
TW200909455A (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display and ultraviolet absorbing polymer
JP5234113B2 (en) Retardation film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display
TW200923504A (en) Liquid crystal display device
TWI718093B (en) Optically anisotropic film
CN110476094A (en) Polarizer, circular polarizing disk and image display device
CN110720064B (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition and retardation plate
WO2012014595A1 (en) Three-dimensional image display device
TW200918967A (en) Elliptical polarizer, process of producing the polarizer and liquid crystal display device equipped with the polarizer
JP2017101235A (en) Liquid crystal composition
TW200919036A (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display
TW200815875A (en) Optical compensation film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
TWI427339B (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP6227488B2 (en) Optical compensation film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, and method for producing optical compensation film
TW201106060A (en) Liquid crystal display apparatus
JP2015200754A (en) Optically anisotropic film, laminate, polarizer and image display device
JP6927285B2 (en) Optical film, its manufacturing method, polarizing plate and display device equipped with it
JP2010128270A (en) Method for manufacturing optical compensation film, optical compensation film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP2009122421A (en) Manufacturing method of retardation film

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees